Panasonic AJSPC700P User Manual
Operating Instructions  
Memory Card Camera Recorder  
Model No. AJ-  
P
Before operating this product, please read the insructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
ENGLISH  
F0705T2056 -F  
Printed in Japan  
D
VQT0T98-2  
PLEASE NOTE:  
z When preparing to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage, to verify that both pictures and  
sound are being recorded normally.  
z Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera-recorder or the P2 cards used, we will not assume  
liability for such failure.  
Software information for this product  
1.Customer advisory: This product includes software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser  
General Public License (LGPL); customers have the right to download, modify, and redistribute source code for this soft-  
ware.  
Descriptions of the GPL and LGPL are stored on the installation CD included with this camera-recorder. See the folder  
named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)). To download the relevant source code, visit  
http://panasonic.biz/sav/.  
Please note that we cannot answer any questions you may have about the content, etc. of any source code you may obtain  
from the above Web site.  
2.This product includes software licensed under the MIT License. A description of the MIT is stored on the installation CD  
included with this camera-recorder. See the folder named \LDOC. (The description is the original (written in English)).  
z Unislot is a trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.  
z Other names of companies and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.  
3
Contents  
4-5 Setting Time Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
4-5-1 Setting the User Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
4-5-2 Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time . . 38  
4-5-3 Setting the Time Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
4-5-4 Externally Locking the Time Code. . . . . . . . . 39  
4-5-5 Providing an ID to the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
4-5-6 Setting UMID Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
4-5-7 CTL Count Setting and Display . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
4-5-8 Mode Check Screen Displays  
Read this first!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
1-1 Camera Unit Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
1-2 Recorder/player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
1-3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions. . 11  
2-1 Power Supply and  
Accessory Mounting Section. . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
2-2 Audio (input) Function Section . . . . . . . . . . .12  
2-3 Audio (output) Function Section . . . . . . . . . .13  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback  
(MODE CHECK button function) . . . . . . . . . . 42  
4-6 Menu Displays in the Viewfinder Screen . . .43  
4-6-1 Menu Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
4-6-2 Setting Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
4-6-3 Selecting Options for USER MENU. . . . . . . . 44  
4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays. . . . . . . .45  
4-7-1 Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen . . . . . . . . . . 45  
4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout . . . . . . . 45  
4-7-3 Selecting Viewfinder Display Information . . . 45  
4-7-4 Display Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment  
Result Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
4-7-5 Setting the Marker Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
4-7-6 Marker Check Screen Displays  
Functions Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
2-5 Menu Operation Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
2-6 Time Code Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
2-7 Warning and Status Display Functions. . . . .19  
2-8 Display Window Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
2-9 LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
2-10 Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback . . 22  
3-1 P2 Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
3-2 Basic Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
3-3 Normal Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
3-4 PRE-RECORDING function . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
3-5 Loop Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
3-6 Recording Review Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
3-7 Normal and Variable Speed Playback . . . . .28  
3-8 Voice Memo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
3-9 Shot Mark Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
3-10 Recording Setting and Operation Mode . . . .29  
(MARKER SELECT button function) . . . . . . . 52  
4-7-7 Checking Return Video Signal  
in the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
4-8 Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor. . . . .53  
4-9 Menu-driven Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
4-9-1 Setting the Switchover of USER SW GAIN . . 54  
4-9-2 Selecting Video Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . 54  
4-9-3 Selecting Function for  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and  
the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control. . . . . . . . 54  
4-9-4 Assigning Functions to USER MAIN,  
Settings for Recording . . . . 30  
4-1 Adjusting the White balance and  
USER1 and USER2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
4-9-5 Setting Color Temperature Manually. . . . . . . 55  
4-10 Handling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
4-10-1 Handling SD memory cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
4-10-2 Formatting, Writing and Reading  
Black Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
4-1-1 Adjusting the White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
4-1-2 Adjusting the Black Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
4-2-2 Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed . . . . . . . 33  
4-2-3 Placing the Camera-recorder  
an SD memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
4-10-3 How to Use the User Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
4-10-4 How to Use Scene File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
4-10-5 Resetting Menu Option Settings  
in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
4-3 Selecting Recording Signals and  
to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
4-10-6 Lens File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Recording System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
4-3-1 Selecting the Recording Signals . . . . . . . . . . 34  
4-3-2 Selecting the Recording System . . . . . . . . . . 34  
4-4 Selecting Audio Input Signals and  
Adjusting Recording Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
4-4-1 Selecting Audio Input Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
4-4-2 Adjusting Recording Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
4
Contents (continued)  
Chapter 5 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
5-1 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
5-1-1 Mounting the Battery and  
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips  
with Thumbnails. . . . . . . . . .77  
6-1 Thumbnail Manipulations Overview. . . . . . . 77  
6-2 Thumbnail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
6-3 Selecting Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
6-4 Playing Back Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
6-5 Switching the Thumbnail Display. . . . . . . . . 80  
6-6 Shot Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
6-7 Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
6-7-1 Playing Back Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
6-7-2 Recording a Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
6-7-3 Deleting Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
6-8 Deleting Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
6-9 Restoring Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
6-10 Reconnection of Incomplete Clips. . . . . . . . 82  
6-11 Copying Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
6-12 Setting of Clip Meta Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
6-13 Setting of Proxy (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
6-14 Formatting a P2 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
6-15 Formatting SD memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
6-16 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode. . . . . . 87  
6-17 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
6-17-1 Clip Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
6-17-2 P2 Card Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
6-17-3 SD memory card Status Display . . . . . . . . . . 90  
6-17-4 Confirmation of Metadata Upload . . . . . . . . . 90  
6-17-5 Video Encoder Card Status Display  
Setting the Battery Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
5-1-2 Use of the external DC power supply. . . . . . . 67  
5-2 Mounting the Viewfinder and  
Adjusting its Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
5-3 Mounting the lens and  
Performing the Flange Back and  
White Shading Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
5-4 Preparing for Audio Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
5-4-1 When Using the Front Microphone. . . . . . . . . 72  
5-4-2 When Using a Wireless Receiver. . . . . . . . . . 72  
5-4-3 When Using Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
5-5 Connection between the USB 2.0 port of  
the AJ-SPC700P and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
5-6 Mounting the Camera on a Tripod . . . . . . . . 74  
5-7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
5-8 Attaching the Rain Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
5-9 Connecting the AJ-EC3P  
Extension Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
5-10 Attaching the Front Audio Level  
Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
(optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Chapter 7 Maintenance and  
Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
7-1 Inspections Before Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
7-1-1 Preparing for Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
7-1-2 Inspecting the Camera Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
7-1-3 Inspecting the Memory Recording  
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
7-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
7-2-1 Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
7-2-2 Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras. . . . 93  
7-2-3 Replacing the Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
7-2-4 Connector Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
7-3 Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
7-3-1 Warning Description Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
7-3-2 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
5
Contents (continued)  
8-7 FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
8-7-1 SD CARD READ/WRITE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
8-7-3 LENS FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
8-7-4 SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
8-7-5 INITIALIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
8-8 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120  
8-8-1 SYSTEM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
8-8-2 LENS ADJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
8-8-3 BLACK SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
8-8-4 WHITE SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
8-8-5 DIAGNOSTIC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
8-8-6 DIAGNOSTIC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
8-8-7 HOURS METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
8-9 OPTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
8-9-1 OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables . . 98  
8-1 Menu Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
8-2 SYSTEM SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
8-2-1 SYSTEM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
8-2-2 OPTION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
8-2-3 REC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
8-2-4 OUTPUT SEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
8-2-5 LCD MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
8-2-6 GENLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
8-3 PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
8-3-1 ROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
8-3-2 MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
8-3-3 COLOR CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
8-3-4 LOW SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
8-3-5 MID SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
8-3-6 HIGH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
8-3-7 ADDITIONAL DTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
8-3-8 SKIN TONE DTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
8-3-9 KNEE/LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
8-3-10 GAMMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
8-3-11 FLARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
8-3-12 CAMERA SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
8-4 VF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
8-4-1 VF DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
8-4-2 VF MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
8-4-3 USER BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
8-4-4 VF INDICATOR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
8-4-5 VF INDICATOR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
8-4-6 MODE CHECK IND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
8-4-7 !LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
8-5 CAM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
8-5-1 CAMERA ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
8-5-2 SHUTTER SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
8-5-3 SHUTTER SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
8-5-4 USER SW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
8-5-5 SW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
8-5-6 WHITE BALANCE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
8-5-7 USER SW GAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
8-5-8 IRIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
8-6 MAIN OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
8-6-1 BATTERY/P2CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
8-6-3 BATTERY SETTING2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
8-6-4 MIC/AUDIO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
8-6-5 MIC/AUDIO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
8-6-6 TC/UB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
8-6-7 UMID SET/INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Chapter 9 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . .122  
6
Chapter 1 Introduction  
The AJ-SPC700P video camera-recorder integrates a camera unit equipped with three CCDs, incorporating a 2/3-inch on-  
chip lens, and a video recorder/player (VTR) that supports DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV formats.  
Utilising P2 cards, which require no mechanism, as media, your AJ-SPC700P offers greater responsibility, operability, and  
portability. It is highly resistant to shock and vibration during recording, and therefore ensures stable operation for capturing  
quality video images under the most adverse conditions.  
1
1-1 Camera Unit Features  
1-2 Recorder/player Features  
/Three CCDs with a 2/3-inch on-chip lens  
/Multiple Slots  
The camera supports aspect ratios of 16:9 and 4:3.
ޓ
 
The AJ-SPC700P is equipped with five slots for P2  
cards. Up to five cards may be inserted in these slots for  
continuous recording. They also provide new recording  
capabilities specific to memory cards.  
/Innovative 14-bit A/D Converted Digital Signal  
Processing Circuit  
This model utilises new 14-bit linear A/D conversion  
technology to digitise video. The signal processor,  
operating at 36 MHz, provides finer reproduction of  
video, together with enhanced stability and reliability.  
z Hot-Swap recording  
The Hot-Swap capability allows cards not in use to be  
replaced without interrupting recording. This facilitates  
continuous recording.  
z Loop recording  
The AJ-SPC700P can retain a certain amount of  
previously recorded material by continuously loop-  
recording data into a specified recording area.  
z PRE-RECORDING function  
/12-axis Independent color Correction  
Operating as  
a
paint function, this capability  
independently corrects colors for each of the 12 axes.  
This feature helps to produce fine images.  
In standby status, the AJ-SPC700P always stores  
video and sound input to the camera for up to 15  
seconds (for the DVCPRO/DV format). This means  
that the PRE-RECORDING function, when turned on,  
records the video and sound for a preceding duration  
/Auto White Balance with Automatic Tracking  
capability  
The white balance is automatically adjusted in real time,  
according to the subject. This is effective for urgent  
recording, where you can’t spare the time to make an  
adjustment through the auto white balance feature.  
preset by the user.  
This feature recovers critical  
moments that you might have missed.  
z Proxy recording (when AJ-YAX800G attached)  
By installing the optional video encoder card (AJ-  
YAX800G), MPEG4 format video and real-time  
metadata such as time code data can be recorded  
simultaneously on the P2 card and the SD memory  
card, together with the video and sound recorded by  
the camera. This function is useful for confirmation of  
editing of clips.  
For more information about the approximate duration  
for proxy recording, see “Approximate Proxy  
Recording Time (optional) on SD memory cards”.  
Please also see <Cautions in using SD memory  
cards>. (page 17)  
/Data Management Capability  
Your AJ-SPC700P has inbuilt data storage capacity for  
one user and four scene files. In addition, an SD  
memory card can be used as a setup card to store data  
for up to eight setups.  
Regarding SD memory cards, please also see  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards> (page 17).  
/Customisable USER Buttons and USER MENU  
The camera unit has three USER buttons, operable by a  
single press, to which frequently used function may be  
assigned. The on-screen menu is also customisable.  
You can create an original user menu screen by  
selecting frequently used menu items. The menu thus  
created can be displayed with a single touch of the  
MENU button.  
z Data protection  
Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting  
unless the files are deleted or the cards are initialised.  
Recordings are written only to free space.  
/Format User-switchable Between DVCPRO50,  
/MARKER SELECT Button  
DVCPRO and DV  
Your video camera-recorder has a button on the front  
that allows you to view marker information on the  
viewfinder screen. This is useful for checking the view  
angle during shooting.  
Recorded video is compressed through a component  
digital recording method that uses a state-of-the-art  
compression technology, and sound is recorded using  
the non-compression PCM recording method, which  
excels in such areas as S/N ratio, frequency bands,  
waveform properties and reproducibility of fine areas.  
These methods further enhance the quality of images  
and sound.  
/Support for ECU  
Your video camera-recorder supports the extension  
control unit AJ-EC3P.  
The format is user-selectable, according to your  
purpose: e.g., DVCPRO50 for higher image quality, or  
DVCPRO for cost efficiency. DV format is also  
supported.  
<Note>  
When the clip is played back in the format not selected  
on the menu, the picture may be disturbed until the  
format is detected.  
7
     
Chapter 1 Introduction (continued)  
/4-channel Digital Audio Recording (all formats)  
/Built-in Time Code Generator/reader  
A special-purpose Subcode track can be used to record  
and reproduce time code information.  
All formats - DVCPRO, DV and DVCPRO50 - support 4-  
channel digital audio recording with high-quality sound  
(48 kHz/16 bits).  
However, this camera uses two audio channels,  
recording the same audio signals onto Audio Channels  
3 and 1, and Audio Channels 4 and 2.  
/Support for Metadata  
Names/titles can also be recorded, e.g. the camera  
person, the reporter, or the program which was  
registered on the SD memory card in advance. This  
information is also useful in managing information on  
clips. Regarding SD memory cards, please also see  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards> (page 17).  
/Clip Thumbnailing  
z Automatic generation of thumbnails  
The AJ-SPC700P automatically generates  
a
thumbnail for each recording cut (clip). It is possible to  
make use of this on the camera-recorder as well as for  
non-linear editing purposes, and after uploading to a  
server.  
z Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor  
The 3.5-inch color LCD side of the your video camera  
recorder can provide a multi-screen view of 12 clip  
thumbnails. You can choose a desired clip to playback  
instantly.  
z Seamless playback of selected clips  
You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail  
view for continuous playback and output of seamless  
video.  
/Features USB2.0 port  
By connecting with a PC via USB2.0, a P2 card inserted  
in the AJ-SPC700P can be used as a bulk storage  
device.  
/DVCPRO/DV (IEEE1394 Digital input/output)  
connection (when AJ-YAD800G attached)  
By attaching the optional IEEE1394 interface board (AJ-  
YAD800G), data can be input or output from a  
connected external IEEE1394 device.  
<Note>  
During continuous playback of clips in different  
recording formats, seamless playback is not available.  
z Display of clip information  
By selecting clips, information added to clips, such as  
the recording time, Voice Memo, Shot Marks and  
metadata can be checked.  
/Voice Memos & Shot Marks  
Each clip can incorporate comments, in the form of  
voice memos, associated with the time code, together  
with shot marks which, for example, can help you  
distinguish OK cuts from reject cuts.  
Both voice memos and shot marks can be added to  
selected clips during and after a recording. This is  
helpful for editing recorded video.  
/Front-mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism  
The AJ-SPC700P features a front-mounted control for  
fine adjustment of the sound recording level. This  
control is particularly effective for adjusting the sound  
level when you are shooting without a sound recordist.  
The control can be disabled.  
/Support for Built-in Unislot Wireless Receive  
The AJ-SPC700P is designed to support an optional  
slot-in wireless receiver.  
/Recording Review Capability  
This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10  
seconds of recorded video, allowing you to quickly  
check the recorded contents.  
8
Chapter 1 Introduction (continued)  
/Recording Time  
1
Recording Time on P2 Cards (Number of cards used: 1)  
Recording Format  
Card No.  
DVCPRO  
DVCPRO50  
Approx.  
8 minutes  
Approx.  
4 minutes  
AJ-P2COO2SG  
AJ-P2COO4HG  
AJ-P2COO8HG  
Approx.  
16 minutes  
Approx.  
8 minutes  
Approx.  
32 minutes  
Approx.  
16 minutes  
(For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
appropriate memory card.)  
<Notes>  
z Operation of the following P2 cards with the AJ-  
SPC700 has been verified:  
Š AJ-P2C002SG  
Š AJ-P2C004HG  
Š AJ-P2C008HG  
z If the one-time continuous recording exceeds the  
duration which is given in the table below when a P2  
card with a memory capacity of 8GB or more is used  
in this unit, the recording is automatically continued on  
a separate clip.  
When performing thumbnail operations (such as  
display, delete, repair or copy) for these kinds of clips  
using a P2 device, it is possible to perform the  
operations for the entire recording as a single clip.  
However, with nonlinear editing software or a personal  
computer, the recording may be displayed as separate  
clips.  
Recording format  
Recording duration  
DVCPRO50  
DVCPRO/DV  
Approx. 10 minutes  
Approx. 20 minutes  
Approximate Proxy Recording Time (optional) on SD memory  
cards  
MPEG4 recording rate  
Card No.  
(Card Capacity)  
192 kbps  
768 kbps  
1500 kbps  
RP-SDH256  
(256 MB)  
Approx. 137 Approx. 35 Approx. 19  
minutes minutes minutes  
RP-SDK512  
(512 MB)  
Approx. 267 Approx. 69 Approx. 38  
minutes minutes minutes  
RP-SDK01G  
(1 GB)  
Approx. 536 Approx. 139 Approx. 77  
minutes minutes minutes  
(Reference values when cards are used for continuous  
recording with our products. Actual recording time  
depends on the kind of scenes and the number of clips.)  
For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory  
cards not available in the operating Instructions, visit the  
P2 Support Desk at the following Web sites.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
9
Chapter 1 Introduction (continued)  
1-3 System Configuration  
Unislot wireless  
microphone receiver:  
Sennheiser EK3041  
Video encoder card:  
AJ-YAX800G  
Extension control unit:  
AJ-EC3P  
Microphone kit:  
AJ-MC700P  
DIONIC90/160  
HYTRON50/100/120  
PRO14, TRIM14  
Microphone holder:  
AJ-MH800G  
Viewfinder:  
AJ-VF15B  
AJ-VF20WB  
V mount type  
Battery plate  
ENDURA50/80  
BP-L60/90  
NP-1 type  
Battery mount  
NP-L50  
Lens:  
(Bayonet type)  
Fujinon, Canon  
BP-90 type  
Battery mount  
BP-H120  
HP-90L  
Memory Card Camera  
Recorder  
AJ-SPC700P  
External DC  
power supply  
Tripod adapter:  
SHAN-TM700  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
IEEE1394 Interface Board:  
AJ-YAD800G  
Soft carrying case:  
AJ-SC900  
P2 Cards*:  
AJ-P2C002SG  
AJ-P2C004HG  
AJ-P2C008HG  
Hard carrying case:  
AJ-HT901G  
USB2.0 compatible devices  
SD Memory cards*  
* For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support  
Desk at the following Web sites.  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
10  
 
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions  
2-1 Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section  
2
POWER switch  
Lens mount cap  
Used to turn on/off the power.  
To remove the cap, raise the  
lens lever.  
When the lens is not mounted, replace the cap.  
Battery mount  
A battery pack from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.  
Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.  
DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)  
This unit is connected to an external DC power supply.  
Tripod mount  
When you want to mount the AJ-SPC700P on a tripod,  
the optional tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) is attached  
here.  
BREAKER switch  
When an excessive amount of current is fed through the  
video camera-recorder, due to any abnormal event, the  
breaker automatically turns off the power in order to  
protect the device.  
After the interior of the video camera-recorder has been  
checked and/or repaired, this button must be depressed.  
If there is no unusual reaction, the unit can be powered-  
up.  
LENS jack (12-pin)  
The lens connection cord is connected here. For a  
detailed description of your lens, see the relevant  
manufacturer’s instruction manual.  
Cable Clamp  
This clamp secures cables for a video light and other  
accessories.  
Shoulder strap fittings  
The shoulder strap is attached here.  
Light shoe  
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.  
Lens mount (bayonet type)  
The lens is attached here.  
Lens lever  
Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.  
11  
   
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-2 Audio (input) Function Section  
MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)  
A microphone (optional accessory) is connected here.  
Power for the microphone comes from this jack.  
A remote microphone may be connected. In this case,  
the power supply to the appropriate connector must be  
enabled through menu option FRONT MIC POWER or  
REAR MIC POWER.  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here.  
LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +  
48V) selector switch  
Used to select the audio signal input from the  
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
AUDIO  
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen  
on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
LINE: Audio signal line-input from the audio device is  
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
input.  
MIC: Audio signal from  
a
self-powered (active)  
microphone is input. (The main unit does not  
supply power to the remote microphone).  
+ 48V: Audio signal from a passive microphone is input.  
(The unit supplies power to the remote  
microphone).  
With the  
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch  
positioned to [MAN], these controls can be used to  
adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1/2.  
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For  
adjustment, each control must be depressed while  
turning.  
Wireless slot  
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be  
attached here.  
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
automatic/manual level adjustment selector)  
switch  
Use this switch to select recording level control mode for  
Audio Channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level  
adjustment) control  
This control adjusts the recording levels for Audio  
Channels 1 and 2. Level adjustment does not depend  
on the position of the AUDIO SELECT switch.  
AUTO: Recording level automatically controlled.  
MAN: Recording level manually controlled.  
The control can be enabled or disabled through the  
menu options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2.  
These options can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
Use this switch to select the signals recorded through  
Audio Channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT: Signal from the microphone connected to the  
MIC IN jack is recorded.  
W.L. (WIRELESS) :  
Signal from the slot-in wireless receiver is  
recorded.  
REAR: Signal from the audio device connected to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connector is  
recorded.  
12  
   
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-3 Audio (output) Function Section  
AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 3-pin)  
Speakers  
This connector outputs audio signals recorded on  
Channels 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
Output signals are selected with the MONITOR  
SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch.  
The speakers output EE sound during recording, and  
reproduced sound during playback.  
The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning  
lamp blinks and/or the indicator activates.  
2
When the  
PHONES jack is connected with  
earphones, sound from the speaker is automatically  
muted.  
MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2 /  
CH3/4 selector switch  
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose  
signals are output to the speakers, earphones or AUDIO  
OUT connector.  
PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)  
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)  
earphones. When earphones are connected, sound  
from the speakers is automatically muted.  
Both the front and rear connectors output the same  
sound.  
CH1/2: Signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 are output.  
CH3/4: Signals on Audio Channels 3 and 4 are output.  
The channel indications on the display window and on  
the audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronised  
with this selector switch.  
When a voice memo is being played back, the recorded  
voice is output to the speakers and earphones,  
regardless of the switch position.  
DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket  
This output socket is designed for 12-VDC. It provides a  
maximum current of 1 A.  
Voice memo microphone  
Used to record a voice memo.  
For more information on voice memos, see [3-8 Voice  
Memo Function].  
MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3 / ST  
/ CH2/4 selector switch  
The MONITOR SELECT switch is synchronised with the  
audio signal output to the speakers and earphones, and  
from the AUDIO OUT connector.  
VOICE MEMO button  
Used to record a voice memo during recording or  
playback, or recording or playback is paused. Another  
press of the button stops voice memo recording.  
CH1/3: Signal on Audio Channel 1 or 3 is output.  
ST:  
Stereo audio signals on Audio Channels 1 and  
2 or Audio Channels 3 or 4 are output. The  
stereo signals can be changed to mixed  
signals using a menu option.  
CH2/4: Signal on Audio Channel 2 or 4 is output.  
<Note>  
Output stereo signals to the PHONES (earphones) jack  
in the ST mode. Output MIX signals to the AUDIO OUT  
jack and to speakers.  
MONITOR SELECT switch  
Monitor  
switch  
CH1/2  
CH3/4  
CH1/3  
Audio Channel 1  
Stereo signals from  
Audio Channel 3  
Stereo signals from  
ST  
Audio Channels 1 and 2* Audio Channels 3 and 4*  
CH2/4  
Audio Channel 2 Audio Channel 4  
* You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using  
the menu option MONITOR SELECT. This menu option can be  
found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
MONITOR (volume) control  
Used to control the volume of sound output from the  
monitor speakers and earphones.  
ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
Used to control the volume of the warning sound emitted  
from  
speakers or earphones connected to the  
PHONES jack.  
If the control is minimised, no alarm is audible.  
13  
 
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
!30"  
!32"  
!31"  
/Shooting and Recording (camera unit)  
CC/ND FILTER (filter selector) control  
Used to select a filter appropriate for illumination and  
color temperature of the subject.  
When the menu option DISP MODE is set to “3”,  
switching this control displays the selected filter number  
in the viewfinder.  
AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch  
AWB: White balance is automatically adjusted.  
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is  
positioned at [A] or [B], the adjusted value is  
stored in the memory.  
However, if “VAR” is selected for the menu  
options AWB A and AWB B, the value set through  
the menu options is used, and this function does  
not work. Menu options can be found in the  
<WHITE BALANCE MODE> screen on the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
Examples of filter selection according to shooting conditions  
Setting of the  
Description of  
filter  
Shooting  
conditions  
CC/ND FILTER  
control  
Note also that when the switch is positioned at  
PRST this function does not work.  
Sunrise, sunset  
Studio  
1
2
3
3200K  
ABB: Back balance is automatically adjusted.  
To automatically correct black shading, the AUTO  
W/B BAL switch must be pressed toward [ABB]  
for longer than five seconds.  
Clear outdoor  
environments  
5600K + 1/8  
5600K  
Cloudy/rainy outdoor  
environments  
<Note>  
To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black  
balance in progress, set the switch to either ([AWB] or  
[ABB]).  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
Clear, bright scenes  
such as snowscape,  
high mountains,  
beaches, etc.  
4
5600K + 1/64  
USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
Gain selector switch  
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions,  
using a menu option. Each button, when pressed,  
performs the assigned function.  
For more information, see [4-9-4 Assigning Functions to  
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 Buttons].  
Use this switch to select video amplifier gain, according  
to lighting conditions under which you are shooting.  
The values for L, M, and H can be preset using menu  
options.  
These are factory-set to 0 dB for L, 9 dB for M, and 18  
dB for H.  
SHUTTER switch  
Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter.  
OFF: Electronic shutter disabled.  
ON: Electronic shutter enabled.  
SEL: Used to change the speed of the electronic  
shutter.  
This dial switch returns to its original position. Each turn  
of the switch alters the shutter speed.  
For more information, see [4-2 Setting the Electronic  
Shutter].  
14  
   
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch  
MARKER SELECT button  
Used to select the video signals sent from the camera  
unit to the memory, viewfinder and video monitor.  
This button selects the marker information indicated on  
the viewfinder screen. It switches between two marker  
information indications, which can be selected using a  
menu option. Pressing this button once switches the  
indicated marker information from A (Marker A) to B  
(Marker B), and pressing again switches B to OFF (no  
marker). When the power is turned on, the last selected  
indication before power-down appears.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:  
Video being recorded through the camera is sent with  
the auto knee circuit activated.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:  
Video being recorded through the camera is sent in  
manual knee mode.  
2
For more information, see [4-7-6 Marker Check Screen  
Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)].  
BARS:  
Color bar signal is output. The auto knee circuit does  
not work.  
You can select between four types of color bar signal.  
For more information, see [8-5-5 SW MODE].  
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons  
These buttons are enabled when the  
shutter switch is  
positioned at [ON] and synchro scan is selected.  
They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro scan.  
The – button decreases shutter speed; the + button  
increases shutter speed.  
If you shoot a PC monitor, for example, you should  
adjust shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the  
viewfinder will produce less noise.  
Auto Knee function  
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery against  
a strongly lit background, the background will be totally whited-  
out, with buildings and other objects blurred. In this case, the auto  
knee function reproduces the background clearly. This function is  
effective when:  
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear  
sky.  
• The subject is a person inside a car or building, and you also  
want to capture the background visible through a window.  
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.  
/Shooting and Recording/Playback Function  
Section (recording)  
REC START/STOP button  
Pressing this button starts recording, pressing again  
stops recording.  
WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)  
switch  
Used to select the white balance adjustment method.  
This button has the same function as the  
REC  
button on the handle and the VTR button at the lens.  
PRST: Use this when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance.  
SHOT MARK button  
The value for the white balance is factory-set  
to 3200 K.  
It can be changed to any color temperature  
using a menu option. For more information,  
see [4-9-5 Setting Color Temperature  
Manually].  
Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark to  
the thumbnail of that clip. This button also adds a shot  
mark to any thumbnail selected on the LCD monitor.  
For more information on shot marks, see [3-9 Shot Mark  
Function].  
A or B: Pressing the  
AUTO W/B BAL Switch  
SAVE ON/OFF switch  
Used to select the power supply method for each output  
section.  
toward [AWB] automatically adjusts the white  
balance, saving the adjusted value in Memory  
A or B. For more information, see [4-1-1  
Adjusting the White Balance].  
ON: The output selected through the menu option  
SAVE SW is power-saved. This option can be  
found on the OPTION MODE screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Your video camera-recorder is factory-set to save the  
adjusted value. Through a menu option, the auto-  
tracking white balance (ATW) can be assigned to B, or  
desired color temperatures can be assigned to A and B.  
For more information, see [4-1-1 Adjusting the White  
Balance].  
OFF: Power saving is canceled.  
<Note>  
During recording, this switch produces no effect. The  
power supply method is switched after recording is  
finished.  
MODE CHECK button  
Each press of this button changes the screen type in the  
viewfinder in the following order: STATUS, !LED,  
FUNCTION, AUDIO.  
VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
This switch controls the superimposition of characters  
onto the video output from the VIDEO OUT connector.  
This does not affect the signal output from the camera.  
ON: Characters are superimposed.  
OFF: Characters are not superimposed.  
For types of characters, see [4-9-2 Selecting Video  
Output Signals].  
15  
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch  
Used to switch the signals output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
P2 CARD ACCESS LED  
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of  
each card.  
MEM: In EE (recording) mode, video from the camera is  
output. In VV (playback) mode, playback signal  
from a P2 card is output.  
CAM: Video from the camera is output constantly.  
OFF: Video is not output. The camera-recorder  
operates in power-saving mode.  
Slide lock button  
Used to open the slide-out door for inserting P2 cards.  
While depressing this button, slide the door to the left.  
USB 2.0 connector  
A USB 2.0 cable is connected here.  
Note that the audio output is synchronised with the  
video.  
For types of video outputs, see [4-9-2 Selecting Video  
Output Signals].  
When the menu option USB is set to “ON”, data can be  
transferred via USB 2.0. During such data transfer,  
recording, playback or operations of clips is not  
permitted.  
<Notes>  
The menu option USB is found in the SYSTEM MODE  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page. For more  
information, see [5-5 Connection between the USB 2.0  
port of the AJ-SPC700P and a PC].  
z During recording, this switch does not switch output  
signals before stopping the recording operation.  
z Even if this switch is set to “CAM”, if “VIDEO” or  
“1394” is selected for REC SIGNAL the AJ-SPC700P  
performs the operation when “MEM” is selected. The  
menu option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM  
MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
GENLOCK IN connector  
This connector is used to input a reference signal when  
the camera unit is gen-locked, or when the time code is  
externally locked. If VIDEO is selected for the menu  
option REC SIGNAL, the connector can be used to  
record actual signals. The menu option REC SIGNAL is  
found on the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
REW (rewind) button and lamp  
During pause, this button performs a fast-reverse  
playback with the lamp blinking.  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4C fast-  
reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps  
blinking.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the  
start of the clip being played back is located in pause  
mode.  
<Notes>  
z The reference input signal must be a standard VBS  
(Video Burst Sync).  
z If you need to synchronise the input signal with the  
AJ-SPC700P when “VIDEO” is selected for the REC  
SIGNAL, set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”.  
The option GENLOCK is found on the GENLOCK  
screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
FF (fast forward) button and lamp  
During pause, this button is used to perform fast  
playback with the lamp blinking.  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4C fast  
playback with the PLAY and FF lamps blinking.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the  
start of the next clip is located in pause mode.  
CAM OUT (camera output) connector  
This connector outputs video signals from the camera. It  
does not output playback signals.  
STOP button  
This button stops playback.  
Connector cover  
Remove the cover, and install the DVCPRO/DV  
connector. For directions on attaching the connector,  
see the instruction manual for the IEEE1394 interface  
board. (AJ-YAD800G, optional accessory)  
PLAY/PAUSE button  
This button is used to view playback using the  
viewfinder screen or a color video monitor. The lamp  
comes on when playback starts.  
In playback mode, this button pauses (PLAY PAUSE)  
playback with the lamp blinking.  
ECU REMOTE (remote control) connector  
The extension control unit AJ-EC3P (optional  
accessory) is connected here.  
REC button  
Pressing this button starts recording, and pressing  
again stops recording.  
This button has the same function as the  
REC  
START/STOP button and the VTR button at the lens.  
It may be disabled with the  
button.  
recording protection  
REC protection button  
This button disables the  
REC button on the handle.  
ON: The REC button is enabled.  
OFF: The REC button is disabled.  
16  
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
VIDEO OUT (video signal output) connector  
2-5 Menu Operation Section  
This connector outputs video signals. The video signals  
linked to the setting of the VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL  
switch are output from here.  
2
OPTION SLOT  
Attach the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional).  
For information about the installation and proxy  
recording, see the AJ-YAX800G instruction manual.  
SD memory card insertion slot  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) is inserted  
here. It is used for metadata upload and proxy recording  
(optional).  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards>  
SD memory cards used with the AJ-SPC700P should  
conform to SD standards. Be sure to format cards using  
the AJ-SPC700P.  
To format SD memory cards using a personal computer,  
download the dedicated software from the support site.  
SD memory cards with the following capacity (8MB -  
2GB) can be used for the AJ-SPC700P:  
MENU button  
Used to turn on/off the menu.  
8 MB  
128 MB  
2 GB  
16 MB  
256 MB  
32 MB  
512 MB  
64 MB  
1 GB  
JOG dial button  
With the menu open, this button is used to navigate  
through menu pages, select options and specify values.  
For directions on manipulating the menu, see [4-6 Menu  
Displays in the Viewfinder Screen].  
For proxy recording (optional), 256MB, 512MB or 1GB  
SD memory cards with “High Speed” indication should  
be used.  
For the latest information not available in the operating  
Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at the following  
Web sites.  
SD memory card insertion slot  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) is inserted  
here. This slot is used for writing/saving menu data.  
BUSY (operation mode display) lamp  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory  
card.  
It stays illuminated when the card is active.  
BUSY (operation mode display) lamp  
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory  
card.  
<Note>  
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.  
It stays illuminated when the card is active.  
<Note>  
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.  
17  
   
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-6 Time Code Section  
GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
TCG (time code selector) switch  
This connector is used to input a reference signal before  
the camera unit is gen-locked, or before the time code is  
externally locked.  
This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the  
built-in time code generator.  
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance  
the time code independently of the P2 card  
recording status.  
TC IN connector (BNC)  
This connector is used to input a reference time code  
when you externally lock the time code.  
Use this mode to synchronise the time code  
with the time of day, or to externally lock the  
time code.  
TC OUT connector (BNC)  
SET:  
Select this position to set the time code and/or  
user bits.  
When you inter-lock the time code of the AJ-SPC700P  
with that of an external device this must be connected  
with the time code input (TC IN) connector of the  
external device.  
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time code  
only during recording.  
For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards, the  
sequence of time codes is unbroken.  
HOLD button  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on  
the counter. Note that time code generation continues.  
Pressing the button again reactivates the counter.  
This function is used to ascertain the time code or CTL  
count of a particular recorded scene.  
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.  
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons,  
and the center rectangular one is the SET button.  
For guidance in setting the time code and user’s bit, see  
[4-5 Setting Time Data].  
RESET button  
This button resets the time data (CTL) on the counter to  
“00:00:00:00”.  
If this button is pressed when with the  
TCG switch  
positioned at [SET], time code and user’s bit data are  
reset to 0, and real-time data is reset to the initial value.  
DISPLAY (counter display selector) switch  
Indications of the time code, CTL and user bits on the  
counter of the display window depend on the positions  
of this switch and the  
TCG switch.  
Pressing the  
Time Zone.  
HOLD button also displays Date/Time/  
UB: User bits indicated.  
TC: Time code indicated.  
CTL: CTL indicated.  
18  
 
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-7 Warning and Status Display  
Functions  
2-8 Display Window Functions  
P2 card/battery-remaining level indications  
2
Media-remaining space indication bar  
The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card,  
using a seven-segment display.  
Each segment can represent either three or five minutes of  
remaining free space, depending on the value set through the  
menu option CARD REMAIN/„. According to the set value, the  
segments disappear one-by-one. The menu option CARD  
REMAIN /„ can be found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on  
the MAIN OPERATION page.  
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD W DV  
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
Battery-remaining level indication bar  
For a battery with a digital indicator (percentage indication), if  
the remaining level of the battery is higher than 70%, all  
seven segments up to the “F” position are lit.  
When the remaining level falls below 70%, the segments go  
out one-by-one for each drop of 10%. All seven segments  
can be set to light up when the battery-remaining balance is  
100%. To do so select “100%” for the menu option BATT  
REMAIN FULL in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen of the  
MAIN OPERATION page.  
Back tally lamp  
When the  
BACK TALLY switch is set to [ON], the  
lamp behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at  
the viewfinder.  
BACK TALLY switch  
This switch controls the action of the  
rear tally lamps.  
back and  
Audio channel level meter  
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 switch is set  
to [CH1/2], the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio  
channel numbers, together with their audio levels. When  
the switch is set to [CH3/4], the meter indicates 3 and 4 as  
the audio channel numbers, together with their audio levels.  
ON: Back and rear tally lamps enabled.  
OFF: Back and rear tally lamps disabled.  
WARNING lamp  
This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something  
unusual occurs in the memory.  
Memory action status indication  
Error Code Indication (for more information, see  
[7-3 Warning System])  
LIGHT button  
Use this button to control illumination of the display  
window.  
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD W DV  
Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of  
0
the  
display window on or off.  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
Display window  
This window displays warnings, battery-remaining level,  
sound volume, time data, and other information.  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
Rear tally lamp  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
When the  
BACK TALLY switch is set on [ON], the  
rear tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back  
tally lamp.  
Information indication  
LOOP:  
Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode. For  
information about the LOOP REC mode, see [3-5  
Loop Recording].  
DRIVE:  
Stays illuminated when the menu option USB is set  
to “ON”. The menu option USB can be found in the  
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
OP-SLOT: Remains illuminated when a video encoder card is  
operated in the optional slot.  
19  
   
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
2-9 LCD Monitor  
Mode indication  
W:  
Stays illuminated in 16:9 mode.  
DV:  
Stays illuminated when the recording/playback format is  
DV.  
P-REC: Stays illuminated when the PRE REC MODE is set to  
ON, and blinks when recording is continued after the  
recording tally lamp has gone out.  
OVER  
OVER  
NDF SLAVE HOLD W DV  
!1"  
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
!2" !3" !5" !4"  
Time code indication  
NDF: Stays illuminated when the time code is in non-drop  
LCD monitor  
frame mode.  
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.  
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a  
thumbnail format.  
In thumbnail display mode, clips can be edited or  
deleted, or P2 cards can be formatted using the  
DF:  
Stays illuminated when the time code is in drop frame  
mode.  
SLAVE:Stays illuminated when the time code is externally locked.  
HOLD: Stays illuminated when the time code generator/reader  
value is frozen.  
CTL: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [CTL] to display the CTL count.  
MENU BAR button and  
CURSOR and SET buttons.  
TCG: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) generator  
value.  
OPEN button  
Used to open the LCD monitor.  
TC:  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) reader value.  
THUMBNAIL button  
This button switches the content on the  
LCD monitor  
VTCG: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the VIUB generator value.  
VTC: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the VIUB reader value.  
TIME: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the real-time hour, minute and second.  
DATE: Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the real-time date.  
from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails.  
Another press switches them back to the video from the  
viewfinder.  
Note that this switchover is not performed during a  
recording or playback.  
MENU BAR button  
No Indication:  
The CTL, VTCG, TIME, and DATE stay off when the DISPLAY  
switch is positioned at [UB] to display real time, time zone, hour  
and minute.  
In thumbnail display mode, this button allows you to  
manipulate the menu bar (e.g., to delete clips).  
Time count indication:  
The time code, CTL, user bits and real time are shown.  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons,  
and the center rectangular one is the SET button.  
They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the  
menu bar. For more information, see [Chapter 6  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails].  
<Note>  
When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB, each press of the  
HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG (VTC) ꢀ  
DATE ꢀ TIME ꢀ No Indication (Time Zone) ꢀ TCG (TC), in that  
order.  
Positions of time code-related switches  
and information provided  
Position of  
DISPLAY switch  
Position of TCG  
switch  
Information Item  
SET  
Time code  
CTL  
CTL  
F-RUN or R-RUN  
TC  
UB  
Time code  
F-RUN/SET/  
R-RUN  
User bits or real-  
time, time zone  
20  
 
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions (continued)  
Back tally lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated during shooting. It also  
2-10 Viewfinder  
blinks in synchronisation with the REC lamp in the  
viewfinder, and provides alerts.  
When the lever is positioned at [OFF], the back tally  
lamp is hidden.  
2
Eyepiece  
Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter, in  
order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image.  
Connecting plug  
Locking ring  
Viewfinder (optional accessory)  
During recording or playback, the viewfinder displays  
the video image in monochrome. It also displays  
warnings, messages, zebra patterns, markers (safety  
zone and center markers), etc.  
Microphone holder  
Viewfinder stopper  
Used to attach or remove the viewfinder.  
ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the  
viewfinder.  
!16"  
!15"  
ON: Zebra pattern displayed.  
OFF: No zebra pattern displayed.  
TALLY switch  
Used to control the  
front tally lamp.  
HIGH: Front tally lamp brightly illuminated.  
OFF: Front tally lamp stays off.  
LOW: Front tally lamp dimly illuminated.  
PEAKING control  
Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the  
viewfinder for easier focusing. This does not affect the  
signal output from the camera.  
Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring  
Used to adjust the side-to-side position of the  
viewfinder.  
CONTRAST control  
Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from  
the camera.  
Viewfinder front-back position anchoring lever  
Used to adjust the fore-and-aft position of the viewfinder.  
<Note>  
BRIGHT control  
For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
viewfinder.  
Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from  
the camera.  
Front tally lamp  
This lamp is activated when the  
TALLY switch is  
positioned at [HIGH] or [LOW], and stays on during  
recording. It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC  
lamp in the viewfinder, and provides alerts.  
Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the  
lamp to ([HIGH] or [LOW]).  
21  
 
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1 P2 Cards  
3
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the EJECT  
button pops up.  
Inserting P2 Cards  
<Note>  
When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be sure to  
set the time data beforehand. On how the time data is set,  
see [4-5 Setting Time Data].  
EJECT button  
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
The card must  
be inserted with  
the logo right  
way up.  
4
Tilt up the popped-up EJECT button, to lock-in the P2  
card.  
POWER: ON  
P2 CARD  
ACCESS  
LED  
2
While pressing down the slide lock button, slide the  
slide-out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
5
6
Insert a P2 card into the AJ-SPC700P. The P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED for the appropriate slot indicates the  
status of the P2 card.  
For how the P2 card status is indicated, see [P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards] (page 23).  
Slidelock  
button  
Slide-out door  
Close the slide-out door.  
<Note>  
Do not leave the slide-out door open when moving the  
AJ-SPC700P.  
22  
   
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
Removing P2 Cards  
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content  
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally  
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at  
[Protect].  
1
While pressing down the slide lock button, move the  
slide-out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
<Note>  
2
3
Tilt down the EJECT button.  
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is  
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not  
take effect until access to the card ceases.  
3
Then, depress the EJECT button to release the P2 card  
so that you can remove it.  
Protect  
Write-protect switch  
Tilt down the EJECT  
button.  
Depress the tilted-down  
EJECT button to release  
the P2 card.  
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards  
P2 CARD  
MODE CHECK  
indication*  
Status of P2 Card  
ACCESS LED  
Writing and reading  
enabled  
<Notes>  
Stays on in green ACTIVE  
z When a P2 card is being accessed or it is being  
recognised after insertion (P2 CARD ACCESS LED blinks  
in orange), do not remove the P2 card.  
If your AJ-SPC700P is not set to turn on the P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED, before removing the card ensure that pre-  
recording and/or voice memo recording have finished (the  
P-REC indication has stopped blinking and the V mark or  
VOICE REC indication on the viewfinder screen has  
turned off) after stopping recording or playback.  
Writing and reading  
enabled. The card is  
recordable (loop recording  
also enabled).  
Stays on in  
ACTIVE  
orange  
Writing and reading  
enabled. However, some  
clips recorded on the P2  
card may not be able to be  
read successfully.  
Stays on in  
ACTIVE !  
orange or green  
z If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder  
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and the AJ-SPC700P  
gives a warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED.  
In addition, all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in  
green. If this is the case, turn the power off. For more  
information on warning indications, see [7-3 Warning  
System].  
z If a P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it  
may become irregular although the data will not be  
corrupted. Check the clips and restore them if required.  
For more information about how to restore clips, see [6-9  
Restoring Clips].  
z If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be  
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays  
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off  
the power, then restart the AJ-SPC700P to reformat the  
card.  
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being  
played back, the inserted P2 card is not recognised and  
the P2 CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come  
on. Card recognition starts when the playback ends.  
Writing or reading being  
performed.  
Blinks in orange ACCESSING  
Quickly blinks in  
INFO READING  
green  
The P2 card is being  
recognised.  
The P2 card has no free  
space. Only reading is  
enabled.  
FULL  
Blinks in green  
PROTECTED  
The write-protect switch on  
the P2 card is positioned at  
[PROTECT]. Only reading  
is enabled.  
The card is not supported  
by your AJ-SPC700P.  
Replace the card.  
NOT  
SUPPORTED  
Stays off  
The P2 card is not properly  
FORMAT ERROR formatted. Reformat the  
card.  
NO CARD  
No P2 card is inserted.  
* The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder. For more  
information, see [4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout].  
<For Your Information>  
The P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs may be set to stay off using  
the menu option ACCESS LED. This option can be found on  
the <SYSTEM MODE> screen, which is accessible from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
23  
   
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
Note that the recording order is retained even if the power is  
turned off. When the power is next turned on, the last card  
written before powering-down will be the target card.  
3-2 Basic Procedures  
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and  
recording. Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your  
system to ensure that it works properly.  
<Note>  
When “SLOT1” is selected for the menu option P.ON REC  
SLOT SEL, recording starts from the P2 card inserted in the  
smallest slot number, after the power is turned on.  
This option is found in the REC FUNCTION screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
* For directions on inspecting your memory card camera-recorder,  
see [7-1 Inspections Before Shooting].  
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion  
1
2
Insert a charged battery pack.  
Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than  
four segments of the battery-remaining amount  
indication bar are illuminated.  
z If the number of illuminated segments is fewer than  
five, first check the battery placement. If placement is  
not the problem, replace the battery with a fully  
charged one.  
Switch Setting  
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches  
as detailed below, before starting to use your AJ-SPC700P.  
Setting the switches before shooting and recording  
USER MAIN:  
This switch is factory-set to  
perform slot selection.  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH 1/CH 2:  
AUTO  
3
Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED stays on in orange or green. Then, close  
the slide-out door.  
When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card,  
the card in the slot with the lowest number is used first.  
However, regardless of slot number, a P2 card inserted  
later will not be accessed until the other cards have  
been used.  
TCG:  
F-RUNor  
R-RUN  
Example:  
If all five slots contain P2 cards, the cards are used in  
order of slot numbers 1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5. However, if the  
P2 card in Slot 1 is removed and then re-inserted, the  
cards will be used in the following order:  
2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ1.  
OUTPUT:  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON  
GAIN:  
Normally, this should be set to 0 dB. If  
conditions are too dark, an  
appropriate gain level should be set.  
Iris: Auto  
<Notes>  
z The USER MAIN button is factory-set to perform the slot  
selection function, which selects the target card from  
among several P2 cards.  
When a new target P2 card is selected, the appropriate  
slot number appears on the P2 card remaining amount  
indicator in the viewfinder.  
2
For more information about the indications in the  
viewfinder, see [4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication  
Layout].  
z SLOT SEL function is enabled during recording; however,  
a few seconds are required for switching slots. When the  
target P2 card is switched during recording, further  
switching to a different P2 card cannot be accepted for  
over ten seconds after the first switch.  
2
1
z The ability to switch to a different target P2 card using the  
SLOT SEL function is not available over ten seconds after  
recording starts.  
3
z When a Voice Memo is recorded simultaneously with the  
video and sound, video and sound recording continues  
after switching of the target P2 card using the SLOT SEL  
function; however, Voice Memo recording stops.  
5
4
3
2
1
24  
 
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
White/Black balance adjustment to recording completion  
Shooting  
White/Black Balance Adjustment to Recording  
Completion  
For shooting, follow the steps below.  
1
Select a filter according to light conditions.  
3
2A  
When the white balance is saved:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].  
2B  
When the white or black balance is not saved and  
you have no time to adjust the white balance:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].  
3
1
4 5, 6 2C 2A, B, C  
This adjusts the white balance against the filter  
according to the position of the FILTER control.  
2C  
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:  
Select a filter according to light conditions. Then,  
position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a  
white test subject so that it appears at the center of the  
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust the white  
balance.  
1. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to  
adjust the white balance.  
2. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB] to  
adjust the black balance.  
3. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to  
adjust the white balance again.  
For directions on making adjustments, see [4-1-1  
Adjusting the White Balance] and [4-1-2 Adjusting the  
Black Balance].  
3
4
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus,  
and zoom.  
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter speed and  
operation mode.  
For more information, see [4-2 Setting the Electronic  
Shutter].  
5
6
Press either the REC START/STOP button, REC button  
on the handle or VTR button at the lens to start  
recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays  
illuminated.  
To stop recording, press either the REC START/STOP  
button, REC button on the handle or VTR button at the  
lens.  
The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out.  
Operation Buttons  
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/  
PAUSE, STOP) are disabled.  
25  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
These are the options for PRE REC TIME.  
3-3 Normal Recording  
1-15 SEC (for DVCPRO 25M or DV)  
1-8 SEC (for DVCPRO 50M):  
Specify the duration for which data may be recorded  
before either the REC START/STOP button, REC  
button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is  
pressed.  
Pressing either the REC START/STOP button, REC button  
on the handle or VTR button at the lens starts recording of  
video and sound on the P2 card.  
A cluster of data that consists of video and sound generated  
through a shooting action, together with such added  
information as a voice memo, is called a “clip”.  
<Notes>  
z “P-REC” indication when the “PRE REC MODE” menu  
option is set to OFF  
<Note>  
Even if a P2 card has just been inserted, or the power has  
been just turned on, you can start recording using the  
internal memory of the AJ-SPC700P. In this case, recording  
cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognised.  
If the inserted card is not recognized as a recordable P2  
card, the record in internal memory is instantly discarded,  
and the message “CANNOT REC” message is displayed on  
the viewfinder.  
After recording is stopped, the “P-REC” indication remains  
displayed until all video and sound are recorded on the P2  
card, even if the PRE REC MODE menu option is set to  
OFF. For more information about the “P-REC” indication,  
see “4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout”.  
z Immediately after the power is turned on, the menu option  
PRE REC TIME is selected and/or the storage duration is  
changed, the content in internal memory will be undefined.  
In these situations, the video or sound will not be recorded  
for the duration specified, even if either the REC START/  
STOP button, REC button on the handle or VTR button at  
the lens is pressed to start recording.  
Press the MODE CHECK button to check P2 card status  
(displayed in viewfinder).  
z A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to  
recognise. In this situation, video or sound may not be  
recorded for the duration specified, even if either the REC  
START/STOP button, REC button on the handle, or VTR  
button at the lens is pressed to start a recording.  
z The internal memory does not store video or sound when  
a playback or recording review is being performed. For this  
reason, no video or sound can be recorded during such  
operation.  
z When recording starts, the time code indication (TCG)  
may be shown as “HOLD” until the P2 card has been  
recognised.  
Rec start/stop button  
Mode check button  
z During recording of IEEE1394 input, PRE RECORDING is  
not available.  
3-4 PRE-RECORDING function  
REC/PAUSE  
(Recording pauses)  
REC start  
(Recording starts)  
The internal memory of your AJ-SPC700P is capable of  
storing several seconds of video and sound data coming  
from the camera. This capability can be used to record video  
and sound several seconds before either the REC START/  
STOP button, REC button on the handle or VTR button at  
the lens is pressed to start recording.  
To use this function, the menu option PRE REC MODE must  
be set to “ON”. The storage duration of the internal memory  
can be set from the menu option PRE REC TIME.  
Real-time video  
Real-time sound  
A
B
C
Specified PRE-REC  
duration  
Previous clip  
Content on P2 card  
A
B
New clip  
PRE REC MODE and PRE REC TIME menu options can be  
found in the REC FUNCTION screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
The function of the menu option PRE REC MODE may be  
assigned to a desired user button by using any one of the  
menu options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW, or USER2 SW.  
These options can be found in the USER SW screen, which  
is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
26  
   
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
3-5 Loop Recording  
3-6 Recording Review Function  
When two or more P2 card slots contain cards, this function  
allows the target P2 card to be switched in order. Even when  
the free space of a P2 card is used up, this function  
continues recording while erasing existing data.  
To use this function, the menu option LOOP REC MODE  
must be set to “ON” The option LOOP REC MODE can be  
found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
When recording is paused, pressing the RET button  
automatically locates the last two seconds of video just  
recorded, and the viewfinder provides video playback.  
After playback, the video camera-recorder is again ready to  
start recording.  
The picture location/playback duration can be increased to  
up to 10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button.  
For short clips, however, when the start of a clip is located,  
continuously pressing the RET button does not play back  
any clips before that clip.  
3
Card1  
Card2  
Card3  
The function of the RET button may be assigned to a desired  
user button by using one of the menu options USER MAIN  
SW, USER1 SW or USER2 SW. These options can be found  
in the <USER SW> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
When recording is paused, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE  
button plays back the last recorded clip, from the beginning.  
After completion of playback, the camera-recorder enters the  
stopped state.  
Before loop  
recording starts  
Content  
recorded  
No content  
Recording starts  
Recording  
Cycle 1  
B
B
C
C
A
Recording  
Cycle 2  
D
<Note>  
The data is recorded in the free space of each P2 card (in order  
of A ꢀ B ꢀ C). When the free space is used up, the content on  
A is erased to perform a new recording on D.  
When the VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch on the side  
panel is positioned at [MEM], the video for REC REVIEW is  
output from the video output connectors (VIDEO OUT  
connector), and also to the viewfinder.  
Note that when a backup device is connected to back up the  
video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up.  
<Notes>  
z When the loop recording capability is used, each P2 card  
must have at least one minute of free space.  
z During loop recording, the P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs for all  
target P2 cards illuminate in orange. Note that if any of the  
target P2 card is removed, loop recording stops.  
z When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON,  
the viewfinder and display window both show “LOOP”.  
However, when only one card is inserted, or when each  
card has less than one minute of free space, the loop  
recording capability does not work, even if the option  
LOOP REC MODE is set to ON. If this is the case, the  
indication “LOOP” flashes in the viewfinder and on the  
display window.  
Recording pauses  
Recording starts  
2-10 Seconds  
Recorded clip  
The PLAY button plays back  
the clip from the beginning.  
The RET button puts  
the video camera-  
recorder into REC  
REVIEW mode.  
z When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON,  
the P2 card remaining free space indicates the minimum  
guaranteed recording time.  
The minimum guaranteed recording time refers to the  
sum, at the time loop recording is stopped, of the  
remaining free space of available P2 cards, except for the  
card with the largest remaining free space.  
Example: If three P2 cards are available, with remaining  
space of eight minutes, five minutes and two  
minutes respectively, then the minimum  
guaranteed recording time is seven minutes.  
z During recording of IEEE1394 input, LOOP REC is not  
available.  
Terminating the Loop Recording Mode  
You can terminate the loop recording mode by either:  
z Turning off the POWER switch of the AJ-SPC700P; or  
z Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to “OFF”.  
27  
   
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
3-7 Normal and Variable Speed  
Playback  
3-8 Voice Memo Function  
A voice memo is voice data which can be added to a clip  
independently of the normal sound data recorded in the clip.  
Voice memos may recorded during recording or playback, or  
when recording or playback is paused. They can be played  
back in thumbnail display mode.  
The PLAY/PAUSE button provides monochrome playback  
through the viewfinder and color playback on the LCD  
monitor. A color video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT  
connector of the AJ-SPC700P also provides color playback.  
<Note>  
Each clip can accommodate up to 100 Voice Memos  
including Text Memos. For more information about Text  
Memos, see “6-12 Setting of Clip Meta Data”.  
If the menu option VOICE MEMO RESERVE is set to “ON”,  
you can record at least 10 minutes of voice memos for each  
P2 card while clip recording is paused or after recording  
ends.  
Variable speed playback  
The FF and REW buttons provide 32C and 4C fast  
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks.  
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the  
beginning of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode.  
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the  
beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause  
mode.  
Recording a Voice Memo  
<Notes>  
To add a voice memo to a clip during recording or playback,  
or when recording or playback is paused, press the VOICE  
MEMO button. A voice memo may be recorded using the  
voice memo microphone. Another press of the button stops  
recording of the voice memo.  
z When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted, or  
when the power has been just turned on for playback, it  
may take some time for the AJ-SPC700P to read clip  
information. If this is the case, the viewfinder displays  
“UPDATING”.  
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being  
played back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be  
played back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be  
recognised after playback ends.  
z If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split  
across more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a  
moment. This is not a fault.  
Voicememo  
microphone  
VOICE MEMO button  
<Notes>  
z Voice memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor  
is in thumbnail mode. For more information, see [6-7-2  
Recording a Voice Memo].  
z Voice Memo is not available during output of color bars,  
video input via the GENLOCK IN connector, recording of  
1394 input (optional) or LOOP REC mode.  
z During voice memo recording, turn down the speaker  
volume to prevent the voice memo microphone from  
picking up sound from the speakers of the AJ-SPC700P.  
z When voice memo recording is performed during  
recording/playback of a clip, the voice memo recording  
also automatically ends when recording/playback of the  
clip ends. Also, when voice memo recording is performed  
during playback of a clip, playback of the clip also  
automatically ends when the voice memo recording is  
ended by pressing the VOICE MEMO button.  
28  
     
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback (continued)  
Associating Voice Memos with a Clip  
3-9 Shot Mark Function  
The portion of the clip with which a voice memo is  
associated depends on when the voice memo is recorded.  
A voice memo recorded during recording or playback is  
associated with the picture in view at the time the VOICE  
MEMO button is pressed. A voice memo recorded when  
recording is paused is associated with the beginning picture  
of the immediately preceding clip. A voice memo recorded  
when playback is paused is associated with the still picture  
in view at the time the VOICE MEMO button is pressed.  
A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish  
that clip from others. With the LCD monitor, only clips that  
have shot marks can be viewed and/or played back.  
Adding Shot Marks  
3
To add a shot mark during recording, press the SHOT MARK  
button. The viewfinder displays “MARK ON” and adds a shot  
mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip. Another press  
of the button erases the shot mark.  
Recording or  
Clip being recorded  
playback  
Recording  
Recorded clip  
paused  
Playback  
Clip being played back  
paused  
SHOT MARK  
button  
Voice memo  
Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip  
thumbnails. For more information, see [6-6 Shot Mark].  
Voice memo recording starts  
<Note>  
<Note>  
When, with PRE RECORDING executed, a voice memo is  
recorded, the voice memo may be associated with a picture  
in view prior to point when the VOICE MEMO button is  
pressed.  
It is not possible to add or delete Shot Marks during output of  
color bars, video input via the GENLOCK IN connector, or  
recording of IEEE1394 input (optional).  
Playing Back and Deleting Voice Memos  
For information on how to play back and delete voice  
memos, see [6-7-1 Playing Back Voice Memos] and [6-7-3  
Deleting Voice Memos].  
3-10 Recording Setting and Operation Mode  
The AJ-SPC700P recording mode works according to the priorities outlined in the following table, relative to the setting of the  
menus and switches.  
Menu switches related to system/recording  
LOOP REC  
Switches  
Proxy  
recording  
(optional)  
Functional  
operation mode  
Recording a  
USB  
REC SIGNAL  
PRE REC TIME  
Shot Mark  
MODE  
Voice Memo  
USB drive  
ON  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
1394 Input record  
(optional)  
1394 (optional) Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled*  
Enabled  
1s - 8s/15s  
LOOP REC  
OFF  
ON  
Enabled*  
Enabled*  
Disabled  
Enabled  
CAMERA or  
VIDEO  
Enabled  
1s - 8s/15s  
Normal Recording  
OFF  
* Enabled only during CAMERA recording (disabled for VIDEO IN recording or color bars)  
29  
     
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To record high-quality video with the AJ-SPC700P, the black  
and white balances must be adjusted according to  
conditions.  
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments  
should be made in this order AWB (white balance  
adjustment) ꢀ ABB (black balance adjustment) ꢀ AWB  
(white balance adjustment).  
3
Place a white pattern at a point where the light  
conditions match those for the light source of the  
subject. Then zoom-in on the white pattern so that  
white color appears in the screen. A white object (cloth  
or wall) may be used instead of a white pattern.  
The illustration below shows the required size for the  
white space.  
4-1 Adjusting the White balance  
and Black Balance  
<Notes>  
z Do not include a high-intensity spot in the screen.  
z The white object must appear at the center of the  
screen.  
4-1-1 Adjusting the White Balance  
1/4 or more of the screen in width  
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must  
be re-adjusted.  
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.  
1/4 or more of the  
screen in height  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
CC/ND FILTER control  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
Flip up the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is  
positioned at [AWB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the white  
balance automatically adjusted.  
<Note>  
To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in  
process (the viewfinder displays “AWB ACTIVE”), re-  
position the AUTO W/B BAL switch at [AWB].  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
6
7
During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays the  
following message:  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
OUTPUT: CAM  
GAIN:Under normal conditions, set to 0 dB  
If it is too dark, an appropriate gain  
should be set.  
AUTO W/B BAL  
switch:  
Used to perform AWB.  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$&7,9(  
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds, and  
the following message will appear:  
2
Adjust the CC/ND FILTER control according to the light  
conditions.  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the  
memory specified in Step 1 ([A] or [B]).  
<Note>  
For examples of CC/ND FILTER adjustments, see [2-4  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section].  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$ꢀ2.ꢀꢁꢂꢃ.  
8
For the 3200K CC/ND filter, if the subject’s color  
temperature is lower than 2300K or higher than 9900K  
the following message appears:  
If the arrow points down (ꢁ) the actual color  
temperature is lower than the temperature indicated. If  
the arrow points up (ꢂ) the actual temperature is  
higher than the temperature indicated.  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$ꢀ2.ꢀꢃꢂꢁ.ꢃꢁ  
30  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Detection area for the white balance  
Retaining white balances  
The detection area for the white balance is selectable  
between 90%, 50% and 25%, using the menu option AWB  
AREA.  
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION  
page.  
Each value in memory is retained even if the video camera-  
recorder is turned off; it will not be lost until the white  
balance is re-adjusted. White balances are stored in either of  
two systems: A or B.  
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “ON” (default),  
each system stores only one value. If this is the case, the  
values are not synchronised with the filters. This option can  
be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE> screen, which is  
accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
The detection area is factory-set to 25%.  
4
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “OFF”, the  
adjusted value for each filter can be automatically stored in  
the memory that corresponds to the position of the WHITE  
BAL switch (A or B). Your AJ-SPC700P has four built-in  
filters; it stores eight (4 C 2) adjusted values.  
Note that, when the menu options AWB A and AWB B are  
set to “VAR”, the color temperatures specified through  
COLOR TEMP A and COLOR TEMP B are used, meaning  
that the white balances cannot be adjusted with the AWB  
switch. The menu options are found in the <WHITE  
BALANCE MODE> screen, which is accessible from the  
CAM OPERATION page.  
90%  
50%  
25%  
When you have no time to adjust the white balance  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the  
position of the CC/ND FILTER control.  
Setting the auto-tracking white balance (ATW)  
The AJ-SPC700P has an auto-tracking white balance (ATW)  
feature that automatically tracks the white balance for  
pictures according to lighting conditions.  
When the white balance has not been  
automatically adjusted  
The ATW feature can be assigned to Position [B] of the  
WHITE BAL switch. To do so, the menu option AWB B must  
be set to “ATW”. This option can be found in the <WHITE  
BALANCE MODE> screen, which is accessible from the  
CAM OPERATION page.  
The ATW feature may be assigned to the USER MAIN,  
USER1, or USER2 button. For more information, see [4-9-4  
Assigning Functions to USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
Buttons].  
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted,  
the viewfinder displays an error message.  
If one of the error messages listed below appears, take the  
appropriate steps, then adjust the white balance again.  
If the error message appears after repeated readjustments,  
the interior of the unit must be inspected. For more  
information, contact your distributor.  
Error message  
Description  
The color  
temperature is too filter.  
high.  
Remedies  
COLOR TEMP.  
HIGH  
Select an appropriate  
To cancel the auto-tracking white balance  
Press the user button that has the ATW feature assigned, or  
change the position of the WHITE BAL switch. Note that,  
when the ATW feature is assigned to [B] of the WHITE BAL  
switch, the auto-tracking white balance cannot be cancelled  
with a user button.  
COLOR TEMP.  
LOW  
The color  
temperature is too filter.  
low.  
Select an appropriate  
LOW LIGHT  
There is  
insufficient light.  
Increase the light level  
or gain.  
LEVEL OVER  
CHECK FILTER  
There is too much Decrease the light level  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
light.  
or gain.  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀ,1+ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+2&./(66ꢀ$:%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃꢆꢇ  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ ꢀ$%%ꢀ2))6(7ꢀꢀꢅ2))  
The FILTER  
control is  
Check the FILTER  
control.  
displaced.  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ35(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$7:ꢀ63(('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
TIME OVER  
AWB was not  
completed within  
the time allowed.  
Shooting conditions  
may be unstable. If  
flicker occurs, press the  
shutter and readjust the  
AWB under stable  
conditions.  
<Note>  
This function does not guarantee 100% accuracy of the  
white balance. When using the AJ-SPC700P, remember  
that there will be some allowance in the trackability of  
changes in lighting conditions and pull-in accuracy of white  
balances.  
Viewfinder displays related to white balance  
See [4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays].  
31  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
<Notes>  
4-1-2 Adjusting the Black Balance  
z Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the  
lens iris is CLOSE.  
z During black balance adjustment, light is  
automatically cut off.  
z During black balance adjustment, the gain  
switchover circuit is automatically switched.  
The viewfinder screen may flicker and/or display  
noise; this is not a failure.  
The black balance must be adjusted when:  
z You use your AJ-SPC700P the first time;  
a
z Your AJ-SPC700P has not been used for some time;  
z The ambient temperature has changed substantially;  
z The gain switchover value has been changed; or  
z S.GAIN (super gain) has been set with the USER MAIN/  
USER1/USER2 button.  
a
z If you find the black shading annoying after  
performing an auto black balance adjustment, adjust  
the black shading. To do so, go to the menu option  
DETECTION, move the cursor (ꢀ), then press the  
JOG dial button. The menu option DETECTION can  
be found in the <BLACK SHADING> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAINTENANCE page.  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
Note that pressing the ABB switch for longer than five  
seconds automatically performs an auto black  
balance adjustment, followed by an automatic black  
shading adjustment. (For more information, see the  
menu option SHD. ABB SW CTL in [8-5-5 SW  
MODE].)  
z To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in  
process (the viewfinder displays “ABB ACTIVE”), flip  
the AUTO W/B BAL switch down to [ABB] again.  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in  
effect before automatic adjustment will be used.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
Used to perform ABB.  
OUTPUT: CAM  
2
3
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned at  
[ABB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the black  
balance automatically adjusted.  
Retaining black balances  
Each value in memory is retained even if the video camera-  
recorder is turned off.  
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the following  
message:  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$%%ꢀ$&7,9(  
<Note>  
During adjustment, the lens iris automatically becomes  
CLOSE.  
4
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the  
following message will appear:  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$%%ꢀ2.  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the  
memory.  
32  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-2 Setting the Electronic Shutter  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6+877(5ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀ!  
This section provides a description of the electronic shutter,  
together with setting and handling directions.  
ꢀ683(5ꢀ9ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢅ)50ꢉ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢉꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢉꢈꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢃꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢉꢃꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢁꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢃꢆꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢊꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢆꢈꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢆꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢉꢈꢈꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢋꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢃꢈꢈꢈ  
4-2-1 Shutter Modes  
The table below shows the shutter modes and speeds for  
the electronic shutter provided in your AJ-SPC700P.  
4
Mode  
Normal  
Shutter speed  
Application  
1
Press the SHUTTER switch, positioned at [ON],  
towards [SEL].  
POSITIONS 1-6  
Used to capture clear images  
of a fast-moving subject  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
Range of 60.3  
Hz to 249.7 Hz  
Used to reduce the effect of  
horizontal lines when  
shooting a monitor screen  
that has a vertical scanning  
frequency of more than 60  
Hz  
SUPER V  
Used to enhance vertical  
resolution  
<Notes>  
z In any mode, the higher the shutter speed the lower the  
sensitivity of the camera.  
z When the iris is automatically adjusted, the higher the  
shutter speed the larger the iris, and the shorter the depth  
of focus.  
SHUTTER switch  
2
Once more, press the SHUTTER switch towards [SEL].  
Repeat this switchover until the desired mode or speed  
appears in the viewfinder screen.  
4-2-2 Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed  
The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the  
SHUTTER switch.  
If all modes and speeds are available, the display  
changes in the following order:  
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, shutter speed can be switched  
easily, using the synchro-scan adjustment switches (+/–) on  
the side panel.  
NORMAL mode  
Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be pre-  
defined; whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN and  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
SUPER V  
mode  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN mode  
SUPER  
V
modes may be determined through the  
<SHUTTER SPEED> and <SHUTTER SELECT> screens.  
These screens are accessible through the menu on the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
The selected shutter speed is retained even if the AJ-  
SPC700P is turned off.  
<Note>  
Your AJ-SPC700P is not factory-set to display the  
SUPER V mode on the viewfinder screen. To display  
this mode, set the menu option SUPER V found in the  
<SHUTTER SPEED> screen, which is accessible from  
the CAM OPERATION page, to “ON”.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6+877(5ꢀ63(('ꢀ!  
ꢀ6<1&+52ꢀ6&$1ꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ683(5ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢆꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢋꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter  
See [4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays].  
33  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-2-3 Placing the Camera-recorder in  
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode  
4-3 Selecting Recording Signals  
and Recording System  
To place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode,  
follow the steps below.  
The AJ-SPC700P is capable of utilising user-selected  
recording signals and format.  
1
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at [ON] towards  
[SEL], to place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO  
SCAN mode.  
4-3-1 Selecting the Recording Signals  
Signals to be recorded are selected through the menu  
options REC SIGNAL and CAMERA MODE. These options  
are found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen, which is  
accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons (+/–)  
ꢄ
ޓ
ޓ
ꢄꢀ6<67(0ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ&$0  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈ0  
ꢀ$63(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢊꢅꢁ  
ꢀ6(7ꢀ83ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢍꢂꢆꢇ$  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ7$//<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ5('  
ꢀ$&&(66ꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ86%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
Setting options and usage  
The option REC SIGNAL is used to select signals to be  
recorded.  
SHUTTER switch  
CAM: Signals from the camera are recorded.  
VIDEO: Signals from the GENLOCK IN connector are  
recorded.  
1394: Signals from the DVCPRO/DV connector are  
recorded. (when the IEEE1394 interface board  
is attached).  
2
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the speed can be switched  
seamlessly between 1/60.3 and 1/249.7 seconds, using  
the SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons (+/–).  
<Note>  
When “VIDEO” is selected for the menu option REC  
SIGNAL, non-standard signals output from the GENLOCK  
IN connector, may degrade video quality.  
4-3-2 Selecting the Recording System  
The recording format is selected through the option menu  
REC MODE.  
The aspect ratio is selected through the menu option  
ASPECT.  
These options are found in the <SYSTEM MODE> screen,  
which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Details of the option REC MODE  
50M: Video is recorded in the DVCPRO50 format (50  
Mbps).  
25M: Video is recorded in the DVCPRO format (25  
Mbps).  
DV: Video is recorded in the DV format.  
Details of the option ASPECT  
16:9: Video is recorded with an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
4:3: Video is recorded with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
34  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Specific audio settings are performed through the <MIC/  
AUDIO1> and <MIC/AUDIO2> screens, which are  
4-4 Selecting Audio Input Signals  
and Adjusting Recording  
Levels  
accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
For more information, see [8-6 MAIN OPERATION].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢉꢀ!  
In any format (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV), the AJ-  
SPC700P supports four-channel audio recording.  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned at  
[AUTO], the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 are  
automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the recording  
levels, position the switch at [MAN].  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢃꢆ0ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ&+  
ꢀ7(67ꢀ721(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
4
4-4-1 Selecting Audio Input Signals  
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1 and 2  
are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more  
information, see [2-2 Audio (input) Function Section].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢃꢀ!  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ0,&ꢀ32:(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ32:(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ021,725ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ67(5(2  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ0,&ꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢎꢊꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ&+ꢉꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢅꢎꢋꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ&+ꢃꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢅꢎꢋꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ/,1(ꢀ,1ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢊE%  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ287ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢊE%  
ꢀ+($'5220ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃꢈE%  
ꢀ:,5(/(66ꢀ:$51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH1/CH2 switch  
Display window  
MONITOR CH1/3  
/ ST / CH2/4  
selector switch  
During 4-channel recording, the same audio signals are  
recorded onto Audio Channels 3 and 1, and Audio Channels  
4 and 2.  
Attaching an IEEE1394 interface board (AJ-YAD800G,  
optional accessory) and recording in the DVCPRO50 format  
via the 1394 input enables independent audio signals to be  
recorded onto each of four channels.  
MONITORSELECT  
CH1/2 / CH3/4  
selector switch  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH1/CH2  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
controls  
buttons  
Your AJ-SPC700P is factory-set to perform no recording on  
Audio Channels 3 and 4 in the DVCPRO and DV formats. To  
enable four-channel recording, the menu option 25M REC  
CH SEL on the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen must be set to “4CH”  
from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Recording on CH3/4  
25M REC CH  
SEL  
options  
DVCPRO50  
format  
DVCPRO or  
DV format  
2CH  
Signals for Audio  
Channel 3 are also  
recorded on Audio  
Channel 1, and  
signals for Audio  
Channel 4 are also  
recorded on Audio  
Channel 2.  
No recording is performed.  
Signals for Audio Channel  
3 are also recorded on  
Audio Channel 1, and  
signals for Audio Channel 4  
are also recorded on Audio  
Channel 2.  
4CH  
<Note>  
Audio Channels 1 and 2 always receive the signals selected  
with the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches.  
35  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-4-2 Adjusting Recording Levels  
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2,  
follow the steps below.  
1
Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4-  
selector switch at CH1/2 so that the audio level meter  
on the display window will provide CH1 and CH2  
indications. Ensure that the channel indications  
displayed in the window are 1 and 2.  
Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO  
LEVEL control must be preset through menu options  
FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2. Note that this  
control is factory-disabled.  
The menu options are found in the MIC/AUDIO1  
screen, which is accessible from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
2
3
Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch at  
[MAN].  
While checking the audio channel level meter in the  
display window or the audio level meter in the  
viewfinder, adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 control.  
Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB), the  
word OVER illuminates to show that the input level is  
excessive. The adjustment made in such a way that the  
maximum level will not reach the 0 dB bar.  
Audio level meter on the display window  
OVER  
DF SLAVE HOLD  
W
DV  
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
1
2
Audio level meter in the viewfinder  
F:1----w  
R:2----w---+  
When operating the AJ-SPC700P without a sound recordist,  
it is recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control  
should be used to adjust the audio level.  
In advance, check the level meter in the viewfinder screen  
and use the AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the appropriate  
audio channel so that no excessive audio signals will be  
admitted.  
36  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Card continuity provided by the user bits  
4-5 Setting Time Data  
If the menu option UB MODE is set to “REGEN”, the AJ-  
SPC700P reads the user bits in the last frame of the last clip  
4-5-1 Setting the User Bits  
recorded on a P2 card (clip with the most recent recording  
The user bits allow information, including memos that use up  
date and time), and records that bit onto the next card. Note  
to eight-digit base 16 numbers (date and time), to be  
that settings for the user bits are not recorded.  
recorded in the Subcode area.  
The menu option UB MODE can be found in the <TC/UB>  
screen, which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
HOLD switch  
DISPLAY switch  
<Note>  
4
The AJ-SPC700P also records the time code and user bits  
in the VIDEO AUX area. The value for the time code (VITC)  
is the same as that of the time code (LTC) in the sub-code  
area. The user bits (of VITC) also records special  
information, including the shoting frame rate.  
Display  
window  
User bits of VITC  
ꢀꢀ)ꢀA)%ꢀ)ꢀ  
ꢀ
Card management data  
z Frame update flag  
z Recording start/stop  
mark  
Verification  
TCG switch  
information on  
the right-hand  
six digits  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
Camera shooting mode  
Fixed value  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
When the left digit starts blinking you can change the  
value.  
600:  
60i  
3
Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits.  
ꢀ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
ꢁ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
ꢂ button: Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
ꢃꢄbutton: Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
4
5
Position the TCG at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN].  
Go to the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION  
page, and set the menu option UB MODE to “USER”.  
<Note>  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],  
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
Retaining the user bits  
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and  
retained even if the video camera-recorder is turned off.  
37  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-5-2 Setting the Internal Clock’s Date  
Time  
difference  
Time  
difference  
Area  
Area  
and Time  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
00:00 Greenwich  
– 00:30  
– 01:30  
– 02:30  
– 01:00 Azores Islands  
– 02:00 Mid-Atlantic  
– 03:00 Buenos Aires  
– 04:00 Halifax  
Press the HOLD button to display a date in the display  
window.  
– 03:30 Newfoundland Island  
– 04:30  
3
4
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
Use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the year,  
month and day (Y/M/D).  
Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set.  
– 05:00 New York  
– 06:00 Chicago  
– 07:00 Denver  
– 05:30  
– 06:30  
– 07:30  
5
6
7
Press the HOLD button to display a time in the display  
window.  
– 08:00 Los Angeles  
– 09:00 Alaska  
– 08:30  
– 09:30 Marquesas Islands  
– 10:30  
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the hour, minute and  
second (h/min/s).  
– 10:00 Hawaii  
– 11:00 Midway Island  
– 12:00 Kwajalein  
+ 13:00  
– 11:30  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN]. The  
internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is  
changed.  
+ 11:30 Norfolk Island  
+ 10:30 Lord Howe Island  
+ 09:30 Darwin  
+ 08:30  
+ 12:00 New Zealand  
+ 11:00 Solomon Islands  
+ 10:00 Guam  
8
Press the HOLD button to display a time zone (time  
difference between local time and Greenwich Mean  
Time) in the display window.  
+ 07:30  
+ 09:00 Tokyo  
+ 06:30 Rangoon  
+ 05:30 Bombay  
+ 04:30 Kabul  
+ 03:30 Tehran  
+ 02:30  
9
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
+ 08:00 Beijing  
10  
Use the ꢂ and ꢃ buttons to set the desired hours and  
minutes ahead of (no sign) or behind (– sign) the  
Greenwich Mean Time).  
+ 07:00 Bangkok  
+ 06:00 Dacca  
Example: If the local time is five hours behind  
Greenwich Mean Time,  
set the time zone to “5:00 –”.  
+ 05:00 Islamabad  
+ 04:00 Abu Dhabi  
+ 03:00 Moscow  
+ 02:00 Eastern Europe  
+ 01:00 Central Europe  
+ 01:30  
+ 00:30  
The time zone is always recorded, together with the  
date and time, as metadata.  
See the table at right to set the time zone according to  
your local time.  
+ 12:45 Chatham Islands  
<Notes>  
11  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN] to  
accept the time zone.  
z In Step 4, if the TCG switch is positioned at [F-RUN] or [R-  
RUN], this also activate the internal clock.  
To cancel date, time and time zone settings in process,  
hold down the SET button and position the TCG switch at  
[F-RUN] or [R-RUN].  
<Notes>  
z When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be  
sure to perform this setting beforehand. Do not  
change the setting during use of the camera-  
recorder.  
z Clock accuracy fluctuates between about  
30 seconds  
per month when the power is turned off. If more accurate  
timekeeping is required, check the time when the power is  
turned on and, if necessary, reset the clock.  
z When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],  
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
38  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-5-3 Setting the Time Code  
4-5-4 Externally Locking the Time Code  
1
2
3
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
The time code generator built into your AJ-SPC700P may be  
locked with an external generator. It is also possible to lock  
an external time code generator with the internal generator.  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
Set the menu option TC MODE to “DF” or “NDF”. “DF”  
steps the time code in drop frame mode, and “NDF”  
steps it in non-drop frame mode.  
The menu option TC MODE can be found in the <TC/  
UB> screen, which is accessible from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
Connections for externally locking the time code  
(examples)  
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and the time  
code must be input.  
4
Example 1ꢏ Locking the time code with external signals  
4
5
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00  
to 23:59:59:29.  
Reference  
time code  
ꢀ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
ꢁ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
ꢂ button: Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
ꢃꢄbutton: Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
TC IN  
Change the position of the TCG switch.  
[F-RUN] steps the time code in free run mode, and [R-  
RUN] set it in recording run mode.  
<Note>  
GENLOCK IN  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET],  
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
Reference  
video signal  
Regeneration of Time Code  
Example 2ꢏ Connecting two or more AJ-SPC700Ps with  
one another, with one being used as the  
reference device.  
When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “REGEN”,  
the AJ-SPC700P reads the time code recorded in the last  
frame on the last recorded clip (with the most recent  
recording date and time) to maintain and record that value.  
The menu option FIRST REC TC can be found on the <TC/  
UB> screen, which is accessible from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
Reference device  
<Note>  
CAM OUT  
TC OUT  
However, when a P2 card is inserted or removed or when  
the recording target P2 card is changed using the SLOT SEL  
function of the USER button, the time code is continuously  
recorded on the clip most recently recorded on the target P2  
card. When there is no recorded clip, the time code is  
recorded on the new recording target P2 card, from the  
value generated by the TC generator built into the camera-  
recorder.  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
CAM OUT  
TC OUT  
Time code function during battery replacement  
Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism  
keeps the time code generator functioning for a considerable  
time (about one year).  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
CAM OUT  
TC OUT  
<Note>  
When the POWER switch has been switched ON ꢄꢃOFF ꢄ  
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode  
is about 2 frames.  
Different camera  
39  
     
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
To externally lock the time code  
Cautions in switching the power source from  
battery to external power supply  
Follow the steps below.  
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply  
before removing the battery pack, in order to keep the time  
code generator energised. If the battery pack is removed  
first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay  
externally locked.  
1
2
3
4
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].  
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
External synchronisation of the camera when the  
time code is externally locked  
Set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”.  
This option can be found in the <GENLOCK> screen,  
which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
When the time code is externally locked, the reference video  
signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen-lock  
the camera.  
5
Supply a phase-relationship reference time code (that  
conforms to the time code requirements) and reference  
video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN  
connectors, respectively.  
<Note>  
To externally lock the AJ-SPC700P, as the master device,  
with more than one unit, the mode must be the same as that  
of the camera. Note that in a system using both interlaced  
and progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the video  
and time code.  
Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the  
reference time code.  
From about 10 seconds after locking the time code  
generator stays locked even if the supply of external  
reference time code is discontinued.  
<Notes>  
z When the time code generator is externally locked, the  
time code instantly becomes locked with the external time  
code, and the counter displays the external time code  
value. Do not put the AJ-SPC700P in recording mode  
before the sync generator stabilises.  
z When the IEEE1394 interface board (AJ-YAD800G,  
optional) is attached, it is not possible to synchronize with  
the time code entered via the TC IN connector if “1394” is  
selected for the menu option REC SIGNAL. The menu  
option REC SIGNAL is found in the SYSTEM MODE  
screen on the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Setting the user bits when the time code is  
externally locked  
When the time code is externally locked only time data is  
locked with the time data of the external time code.  
This means that the user bits may be set separately for each  
camera-recorder.  
When “EXT” is specified for the menu option UB MODE, the  
user bits is also locked with the user bits of the external time  
code.  
The menu option UB MODE can be found in the <TC/UB>  
screen, which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
To unlock the externally locked time code  
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the  
TCG switch at [R-RUN].  
40  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-5-5 Providing an ID to the Camera  
4-5-6 Setting UMID Information  
The camera ID is specified through the <CAMERA ID>  
screen.  
The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters,  
symbols, and/or spaces.  
The AJ-SPC700P supports UMID metadata. You need to  
specify as UMID information the country where you live  
(using up to three characters), organisation or company (up  
to four characters) and user name (up to four characters).  
For the country name, you must use abbreviations  
prescribed in the ISO3166 Country Code* .  
Here are some examples of the correct method for  
specifying a user name:  
<Note>  
1
When the settings menu is displayed, outputting color bar  
signals does not indicate the camera ID.  
4
*1 Examples: China  
CHN  
1
Go to the <CAMERA ID> screen from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
U.S.A. USA  
Canada CAN  
Japan JPN  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'ꢀ!  
ꢀ,'ꢉꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢀ,'ꢃꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢀ,'ꢁꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢄꢀ80,'ꢀ6(7ꢌ,1)2ꢀ!  
ꢀꢀꢎꢎ2:1(5ꢎꢎ  
ꢀ&28175<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ25*$1,=$7,21ꢀꢀꢅꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ86(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢄ
ꢀꢐꢐ'(9,&(ꢀ12'(ꢐꢐ  
2
3
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to options  
[ID1:] - [ID3:].  
1
2
3
4
Go to the <UMID SET/ INFO> screen from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
Press the JOG dial button. The cursor moves to the ID  
entry area, allowing you to enter an ID.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [USER].  
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character  
appears. The characters that appear are switched in  
the following order:  
Press the JOG dial button. The cursor moves to the  
user entry area, allowing you to enter a user name.  
Space:  
†
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character  
appears. The characters appear in the following order:  
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
Space:  
†
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
', >, <, /, -  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
5
6
7
8
9
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired  
character.  
', >, <, /, -  
<Note>  
Turn the JOG dial button to move cursor to the next digit  
(clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 - 5 to set characters.  
The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical  
characters and spaces.  
When all the characters are set, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor to [:].  
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired  
character.  
Pressing the JOG dial button brings the cursor back to  
the options [ID1:] - [ID3:].  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next  
digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 to 5 to set  
characters.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPC700P is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
7
8
When the last character is set, press the JOG dial  
button to bring the cursor back to the option [USER].  
<Note>  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to “BAR”, the  
camera ID is recorded together with color bar signals.  
This menu option is accessible from the <VF  
INDICATOR1> screen, which is accessible from the VF  
page.  
41  
     
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
The reference value (value of the first frame of the first clip)  
is changed when either of the following occurs:  
4-5-7 CTL Count Setting and Display  
By setting the DISPLAY switch to “CTL”, CTL count is  
z The power is turned on, the first frame becomes 0.  
displayed on the time count indication of the LCD display  
z When the playback CTL count is reset, the current  
window.  
playback position is set as 0, and the previous reference  
The CTL count is displayed in 12 hours with non-drop-  
value becomes a negative value.  
frame.  
The playback order of clips recorded on a P2 card is not  
Example:  
linear as for VTRs. It is organized according to thumbnail  
operations or exchanging P2 cards, and the priority of  
recorded clips will be altered. Therefore, different CTL  
counts are displayed for recording mode and playback  
mode, respectively.  
First frame  
Current value  
Clip 3  
Clip 2  
00:02:00:00  
Clip 1  
00:00:00:00  
00:01:00:00  
00:03:00:00  
Reset  
CTL count for recording mode (recording CTL)  
First frame  
Recording CTL count is displayed during recording mode  
(REC, REC/PAUSE, STOP and REC REVIEW), and the  
count continues from the end point of the previous recording.  
Recording CTL count is retained even if the power is turned  
off. When the power is next turned on, the count continues  
from the previous value.  
Clip 2  
Clip 1  
–00:02:00:00  
Clip 3  
–00:03:00:00  
–00:01:00:00  
00:00:00:00  
<Note>  
If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL  
count is being displayed, only the playback CTL count is  
reset.  
<Note>  
If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL  
count is being displayed, only the recording CTL count is  
reset. Note that reset is disabled during the REC REVIEW  
operation.  
4-5-8 Mode Check Screen Displays  
(MODE CHECK button function)  
CTL count for the playback mode (playback CTL)  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check  
the settings and status of the AJ-SPC700P.  
Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the  
screen as follows:  
During playback mode (PLAY, FF, REW, PLAY/PAUSE),  
playback CTL count is displayed.  
Whenever the playback order of clips is altered (clips are  
sorted by shooting dates), previous playback CTL count is  
disabled. The first frame of the first clip is used as a  
reference value for recalculation, and the new playback CTL  
count is displayed.  
STATUS screen ꢀ !LED screen ꢀ FUNCTION screen ꢀ  
AUDIO screen ꢀ No indication  
Each screen is displayed for about three seconds. A press of  
the MODE CHECK button switches the current screen.  
Whether or not to display each screen is specified through  
the <MODE CHECK IND> screen, which is accessible from  
the VF page.  
Example:  
First frame  
Current value  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
00:02:00:00  
Delete Clip 2.  
Current value  
Clip 3  
00:01:00:00 00:02:00:00  
Clip 3  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ02'(ꢀ&+(&.ꢀ,1'ꢀ!  
00:00:00:00  
00:01:00:00  
00:03:00:00  
ꢀ67$786ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀꢑꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ)81&7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ3ꢂ21ꢀ,1'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Clip 1  
00:00:00:00  
The playback order of clips is altered when either of the  
following occurs:  
z Clips are deleted, copied or restored, or the P2 card is  
formatted.  
z The thumbnail display is switched (for more information,  
see [6-5 Switching the Thumbnail Display]).  
z A P2 card is inserted or removed.  
42  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-6-2 Setting Menu Options  
4-6 Menu Displays in the  
Viewfinder Screen  
The menu options are set with the MENU and JOG dial  
buttons.  
The menu comprises main menu, sub-menus and options  
menus.  
4-6-1 Menu Configuration  
The data specified through menu options are written and  
saved in the internal memory of the AJ-SPC700P.  
This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU.  
The other menus can be configured in the same manner (the  
method of displaying the menu screen depends on the  
particular menu).  
USER MENU: USER MENU is factory-set. The menu can be  
configured to suit your preferences by  
specifying each option according to your  
purposes and frequency of use, through the  
<USER MENU SELECT> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN MENU page.  
For more information, see [4-6-3 Selecting  
Options for USER MENU].  
4
<Note>  
When the AJ-SPC700P is in thumbnail mode, the viewfinder  
displays “THUMBNAIL OPEN”, disabling navigation through  
the menu.  
To display USER MENU, press the MENU  
button.  
1
Press the MENU button for three seconds or longer.  
The MAIN MENU screen appears, together with its  
options.  
MAIN MENU: Allows you to set all options on the settings  
menu.  
This menu has  
a
category-by-category  
structure, layered according to purposes and  
frequency of use.  
ꢄ
ꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀ0$,1ꢀ0(18ꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
To display MAIN MENU, press the MENU  
button for three seconds or longer.  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢀ9)  
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
OPTION MENU  
:
Provides options which may be needed if  
functions are added in the future.  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
To display OPTION MENU, hold down the  
LIGHT button and press the MENU button.  
For more information, contact your distributor.  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7  
LIGHT button  
SYSTEM SETTING:  
This option is used to specify recording signal,  
recording system, etc.  
PAINT:  
This option is used to fine-adjust images while  
monitoring the output waveform of the  
camera, using the waveform monitor.  
Normally, this adjustment requires assistance  
from a video engineer.  
This menu option may be set with an external  
remote controller, and is useful when using  
the AJ-SPC700P without a sound recordist.  
Used to select the information items to be  
displayed in the viewfinder screen.  
VF:  
CAM OPERATION:  
Used to change settings according to the  
conditions for the subject.  
MAIN OPERATION:  
MENU button  
Used to specify recording-related items, such  
as audio settings, time code, battery and P2  
card remaining amounts.  
JOG dial button  
FILE:  
Used to specify file-related items such as SD  
memory card reading/writing and lens file  
settings.  
MAINTENANCE:  
Used to specify maintenance-related items.  
USER MENU SELECT:  
Used to edit USER MENU.  
43  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
2
3
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a  
desired menu option. Then, press the JOG dial button  
to display the sub-menu screen.  
5
Turn the JOG dial button to change the value.  
To increase the value:  
Turn the JOG dial button clockwise, as seen from the  
front of the camera.  
ꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀ0$,1ꢀ0(18ꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
To decrease the value:  
Turn the JOG dial button anti-clockwise, as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step. A  
quick turn changes the value rapidly; a slow turn makes  
a fine adjustment.  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢀ9)  
ꢄ
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7  
To turn an option on or off:  
To select ON, turn the JOG dial button clockwise, as  
seen from the front of the camera.  
To select OFF, turn the JOG dial button anti-clockwise,  
as seen from the front of the camera.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a  
desired menu option. Then, press the JOG dial button  
to display the options screen.  
6
7
8
Press the JOG dial button.  
The value stops blinking and is accepted.  
ꢄꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21ꢀ!  
To change the settings for other options on the same  
page, repeat Steps 4 - 6.  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀ63(('  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀ6(/(&7  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ6:  
ꢀ6:ꢀ02'(  
When the settings are finalised, press the MENU  
button.  
This terminates the menu option setting mode and  
returns the AJ-SPC700P to normal operation mode.  
ꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ*$,1  
ꢀ,5,6  
4-6-3 Selecting Options for USER MENU  
Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU.  
Then, open relevant options menu screens to select options  
to add to USER MENU.  
Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER  
MENU.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a  
desired option. Then, press the JOG dial button. The  
value starts blinking.  
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ!  
For information about how to navigate this menu, see [4-6-2  
Setting Menu Options].  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0$,1ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6/27ꢀ6(/  
ꢀ86(5ꢉꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ86(5ꢃꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ,1+  
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀ!  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢒ6(/(&7ꢀ02'(ꢓ  
ꢄ
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢀ9)  
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
<Note>  
Options with [_] are effective. The number of options that  
can be added to USER MENU is 14 C 3 = 42 (three pages  
of options) for camera-related options, and 14 (one page of  
options) for memory-related options.  
44  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout  
The indications are arranged as illustrated below.  
4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status  
Displays  
In addition to video images, the viewfinder displays lamps  
and text that indicate the settings and operating status of the  
AJ-SPC700P, together with messages, a center marker, a  
safety zone marker and the camera ID.  
ꢂ
  ꢄ ! $ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ T ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ   ꢀ x t y ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ S @ 8 ꢁ   # % W  
ꢃ
ꢀ
ꢃ
@Y! ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ # ꢀ F  
[1]  
ꢁꢁ  
# x t y ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ Q S P   #  
ꢁꢂ ꢂ ꢁ B 6 D I ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ V T @ S ꢁ T X ꢁ B 6 D I ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ  
ꢁ ꢁ G P X ꢁ ) ꢁ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ T ꢃ B 6 D I ) " ꢀ ꢄ " %  
ꢁ ꢁ H D 9 ꢁ ) ꢁ (  
ꢁ ꢁ C D B C )   ' ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ  
4-7-1 Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen  
4
V H ) T G P U ꢁ T @ G  
V   ) T ꢃ B 6 D I ꢁ " ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ V ! ) D I C  
i
7
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ S @ 8 ꢁ X 6 S I D I B ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ D 9  
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ U 8 B ꢁ ꢀ ꢀ ) ꢀ ꢀ ) ꢀ ꢀ ) ꢀ ꢀ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ Q ꢂ S @ 8  
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ  
ꢁ A )   ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢅ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ 9 W  
ꢁ
i
7
ꢃ
  ꢁ 6 ꢁ   ' ꢁ W ꢁ A ) ! ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢅ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢅ ꢅ A   # ꢁ a ( (  
ꢁ
For more information, see the following pages:  
4-7-3 Selecting Viewfinder Display  
Information  
The above viewfinder is the  
AJ-VF20WBP (for further  
information on your optional  
viewfinder model, see the  
relevant instruction manual).  
To select the information items you want to have displayed in  
the viewfinder screen, go to the <VF INDICATOR1> and <VF  
INDICATOR2> screens from the VF page, and turn on or off  
the appropriate options, or specify desired values.  
For directions on setting the options, see [4-6-2 Setting  
Menu Options].  
TALLY/REC (recording) Lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated during recording, and starts  
blinking if any abnormal action occurs.  
For more information, see [7-3 Warning System].  
Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp  
This lamp comes on when the AJ-SPC700P is in any of  
the abnormal operating statuses specified through the  
menu sub-option !LED.  
For statuses that activate the lamp, see the options in  
the <!LED> screen in [8-4-7 !LED].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ,1',&$725ꢉꢀ!  
ꢀ(;7(1'(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ:+,7(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ*$,1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ,5,6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢏ,5,6  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ%$5  
ꢀ,'ꢀ326,7,21ꢀꢀꢅ833(5ꢀ/  
ꢀ'$7(ꢌ7,0(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ=220ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢅ21  
BATT (battery) Lamp  
This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the  
battery charge starts to run out, and stays illuminated  
after the battery is completely flat. The battery should be  
replaced before it is nearly flat, so that operation will not  
be interrupted.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ,1',&$725ꢃꢀ!  
For more information, see [7-3 Warning System].  
ꢀ3ꢃ&$5'ꢀ5(0$,1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77(5<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ7&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ,1)2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ6$9(ꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6$9(  
ꢀ'9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ92,&(ꢀ0(02ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ67$786ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ352;<ꢀ5(&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
SAVE Lamp  
In the normal setting:  
The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned  
at [ON] and the output of video and audio is power-  
saved.  
When the menu option SAVE LED is set to “P2  
CARD”:  
The lamp comes on when the P2 card remaining free  
space is getting low.  
The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the <VF  
INDICATOR2>, which is accessible from the VF page.  
50 (50-Mbps recording/playback) Lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated when the AJ-SPC700P is  
set to the DVCPRO50 (50 Mbps) format, and when  
playback is being performed in the DVCPRO50 format.  
Note that the lamp is factory-disabled. For more  
information, see the relevant section of the menu option  
50M INDICATOR in [8-4-1 VF DISPLAY].  
45  
         
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Information Item  
Extender  
Indication  
Status  
EX2  
Lens extender used.  
LOW/MID/HIGH  
Value set for the master gain  
Example: LOW: 0  
Gain value to which S.GAIN is assigned  
MODE CHECK  
Indication Area  
(STATUS:  
–3 to 30  
30/36  
S.GAIN  
Master gain,  
USER SW GAIN)  
(Cause of !LED  
illumination: displayed  
full-screen)  
GAIN (0 dB)  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
SHUTTER  
WHITE PRE.  
EXTENDER  
BLACK STR.  
MATRIX  
COLOR COR.  
FILTER  
SUPER V  
50M/25M/DV  
ATW  
Gain status  
Gain status  
Shutter status  
White balance status  
Extender status (EX2 or OFF)  
Black stretch status (ON or OFF)  
MATRIX status (A, B, or OFF)  
Color correction status (ON or OFF)  
Filter status  
SUPER V status (ON or OFF)  
Recording mode (50M, 25M, or DV)  
ATW status (ON or OFF)  
z Indications selected  
through the menu option  
!LED are marked with [ ! ].  
z Indications which may  
activate the !LED are  
marked with [ ].  
(FUNCTION:  
VIDEO OUT)  
SW: MEM/CAM/OFF  
SELECT: VBS/VF/Y  
Position of VIDEO OUT OUTPUT SEL switch.  
Setting for menu option VIDEO OUT SEL. This option can be found in the  
<OUTPUT SEL> screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
CHAR: ON/OFF  
TOTAL  
Position of VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
(FUNCTION:  
P2CARD STATUS)  
Total remaining free space/capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 Card Slots  
1 - 5  
Remaining free space/capacity of each card. The numbers denote the P2  
card slot numbers.  
SLOT1/SLOT2/SLOT3/  
SLOT4/SLOT5  
The card status is indicated as:  
ACTIVE/ACTIVE!/ACCESSING/INFO READING/FULL/PROTECTED/  
NOT SUPPORTED/FORMAT ERROR/NO CARD/PROXY  
For details of statuses, see [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards]  
(page 23).  
OP-SLOT  
Indicates optional slot status.  
The card status is indicated as:  
PROXY/NO CARD/NOT SUPPORTED  
(AUDIO: Enabling or  
disabling the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control)  
CH1: ON/OFF  
CH2: ON/OFF  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 1, then ON is  
indicated. If not, OFF is indicated.  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 2, then ON is  
indicated. If not, OFF is indicated.  
(AUDIO: Power status  
for the microphone)  
FRONT: ON/OFF  
REAR: ON/OFF  
Power status of the front microphone  
Power status of the rear microphone  
For more information, see [8-6-5 MIC/AUDIO2].  
(AUDIO: Input signal  
and level for each  
channel)  
FRNT/W.L./REAR  
CH1/2  
Input signal and level for each channel  
46  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
AWB A ACTIVE  
AWB being performed on Ch A.  
AWB being performed on Ch B.  
AWB successful on Ch A.  
AWB successful on Ch B.  
AWB action aborted by user.  
AWB action failed. The second line indicates the status.  
Color temperature too low.  
Color temperature too high.  
Brightness too high.  
Brightness too low.  
Camera Warning and  
Report Area  
(related to AWB, ABB  
AWB B ACTIVE  
AWB A OK _._K  
AWB B OK _._K  
AWB BREAK _._K  
AWB NG  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
LEVEL OVER  
LOW LIGHT  
and switch settings)  
4
TIME OVER  
AWB PRESET _._K  
ATW MODE  
CHECK FILTER  
AWB A VARꢄ_._K  
AWB B VAR _._K  
ABB ACTIVE  
Action timed-out.  
AWB cannot proceed because the AWB switch is positioned at [PRE].  
AWB cannot proceed during ATW.  
Make sure the FILTER control is positioned correctly.  
AWB cannot proceed because [A] is set to “VAR”.  
AWB cannot proceed because [B] is set to “VAR”.  
ABB being performed.  
ABB OK  
ABB BREAK  
ABB action successful.  
ABB action aborted by user.  
ABB NG  
W-SHD ACTIVE  
W-SHD OK  
W-SHD BREAK  
W-SHD NG  
ABB action failed.  
White shading being adjusted.  
White shading has been adjusted.  
White shading action aborted by user.  
White shading adjustment failed due to excessive brightness.  
LVL OVER  
B-SHD READY  
Black shading accepted (by holding down the ABB switch during ABB  
adjustment).  
B-SHD ACTIVE  
B-SHD OK  
B-SHD BREAK  
B-SHD NG  
Black shading being adjusted.  
Black shading adjustment successful.  
Black shading adjustment aborted by user.  
Black shading adjustment failed.  
(Switch changeover  
indication)  
WHITE: # _._K  
The WHITE BAL switch has been switched. # is replaced with A, B or PRE.  
When [A] and [B] are set to “VAR”, then it is indicated as VAR _._ K. When  
[B] is assigned ATW, then it is indicated as ATW MODE.  
AUTO KNEE switch has been switched to ON or OFF.  
Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button.  
When the shutter speed has been switched, the shutter speed is indicated.  
Shutter speed is in SYNCRO SCAN mode.  
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF  
GAIN:__dB  
SS: 1/____  
SS: ꢅ 1/____  
SS: SUPER V  
Shutter speed is in SUPER V mode.  
FILTER: _ _._K  
EXTENDER: ON/OFF  
IRIS: __ F _._  
Filter position and detail have been switched.  
Lens extender has been turned on or off.  
Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed.  
(Low light warning)  
(Y GET value)  
LOW LIGHT  
Brightness too low.  
___._%  
When the Y GET function is being carried out (the output brightness level near  
the Center marker is being measured for about three seconds: the level is  
represented as a percentage), the output brightness level near the center  
marker is indicated as a percentage.  
(MARKER indication)  
MKR: A/B/OFF  
Current marker type  
INH  
User buttons disabled.  
Selected S.GAIN  
Whether S.IRIS is ON or OFF.  
Iris override can be set (the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is ON).  
Status of SUPER BLACK (ON or OFF). When it is ON, the set value is also  
indicated.  
Status of BLACK STRETCH (shade correction for the black level): ON or OFF  
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 1 has been switched.  
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 2 has been switched.  
USER button acts as REC switch.  
User button  
functions  
UM: USER MAIN  
button  
U1: USER1 button  
U2: USER2 button  
S.GAIN __dB/OFF  
S.IRIS ON/OFF  
I.OVR ON/OFF  
S.BLK –__/OFF  
B.STR ON/OFF  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Y GET ON  
RET SW  
ATW ON/OFF  
NEWS-G ON/OFF  
SLOT SEL  
PRE REC  
Y GET function ON.  
USER button acts as RET switch.  
ATW being performed.  
Status of News Gamma (ON or OFF)  
Switch that changes the target card is set.  
Indicates that PRE RECORDING mode has been switched ON or OFF.  
Indicates whether USB Drive Mode is ON or OFF.  
USB  
1 - 4  
-
Position of the CC/ND filter.  
Filter not positioned correctly.  
Filter position  
A
B
P
T
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [A].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [B].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [PRE].  
ATW mode active. When brightness and color are outside operating limits, the  
indication blinks.  
WHITE BAL switch  
position  
47  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Information Item  
Gain value  
Indication  
Status  
__dB  
Current gain value.  
SYSTEM ERROR-__  
Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications  
or reference signal. No further recording or playback can be performed. __ꢄis  
replaced with an error code.For more information, see [7-3-2 Error Codes].  
P2 card has been removed while being accessed (recorded, played back, or  
formatted), and subsequent operation is disabled.  
An error has occurred while recording data to or playing data from a P2 card.  
In the actual indication the _ is replaced by the slot number of the P2 card  
that triggered the error.  
System information  
and warnings  
TURN POWER OFF  
CARD ERR _  
REC WARNING  
BACKUP BATT EMPTY  
WIRELESS-RF  
EOM  
Something abnormal is happening to video and/or audio being recorded.  
Backup battery needs replacing.  
RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded.  
P2 card has no free space.  
BOS  
Playback position is at the start of all the clips.  
EOS  
CANNOT REC  
Playback position is at the end of all the clips.  
The P2 card is not recordable. Detailed information is provided on the  
FUNCTION screen of MODE CHECK. See the relevant section of the  
MODE CHECK indication area.  
CANNOT PLAY  
Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded, or the P2  
card contains no clips.  
COMM ERROR  
Displayed when disconnection between microcomputers continues for a  
specified period or longer.  
VOICE CANNOT REC  
Voice memos cannot be recorded, possibly perhaps because the P2 card has  
no free space, or 100 voice memos are already recorded on one clip.  
Voice memo being recorded.  
VOICE REC  
VOICE OFF  
Recording of voice memo stopped.  
VOICE PLAY  
MARK ON/OFF  
Voice memo being played back.  
Shot mark been added or deleted. For information on shot marks, see [3-9  
Shot Mark Function].  
UPDATING  
USB DRIVE  
Clip information is being updated. Playback operation disabled.  
AJ-SPC700P is in USB mode. When communication is disabled, the  
indication blinks.  
THUMBNAIL OPEN  
1394 INITIAL ERROR  
Thumbnail is being manipulated.  
Displayed when the connection of the DVCPRO/DV connector is abnormal  
(when AJ-YAD800G is attached).  
Displayed when proxy recording on either the P2 card or the SD memory card  
starts (when AJ-YAX800G is attached).  
Displayed when proxy recording on the P2 card starts (when AJ-YAX800G is  
attached.).  
PROXY REC P2&SD  
PROXY REC P2  
When the remaining free space on the SD Memory card drops below one  
minute during proxy recording, the message is displayed (when AJ-YAX800G  
is attached).  
NEAR END (SD)  
Displayed when full capacity is reached during proxy recording on the SD  
memory card (when AJ-YAX800G is attached).  
EOM (SD)  
Displayed when proxy recording stops because of failure on either the video  
encoder card or the stream.(when AJ-YAX800G is attached).  
Displayed when a failure occurs on the SD memory card during proxy  
recording, and only recording on the SD memory card stops.(when AJ-  
YAX800G is attached).  
PROXY CARD ERROR  
SD CARD WRITE ERR  
Voice memo being recorded. When the free space for voice memos is less  
than one minute, the indication blinks.  
V
Voice memo indication  
- - - - „- - - - +  
F
W
R
Selected channel together with its audio level.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at FRONT.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at WIRELESS.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at REAR.  
Audio input channel  
and level meter  
TCG  
TCR  
(V)UBG  
(V)UBR  
CTL  
12:59:59:20  
12:59:59:20  
AB CD EF 00  
12 34 56 78  
–1:59:59:20  
TCG (time code generator value)  
TCR (time code reader value)  
UBG VUBG  
UBR VUBR.  
Displays CTL count.  
Time code indication  
DV  
DV format specified and playback being performed in the DV format.  
DV format indication  
+ +  
+
Correction phase of the iris override (when active)  
Iris override  
indication  
+ + : On the open side by 1  
– – : On the closed side by 1  
No indication : Standard status  
+: On the open side by 0.5  
–: On the closed side by 0.5  
(No indication)  
–
– –  
NC  
Lens cable is not connected.  
Lens iris is at maximum.  
Lens iris value  
Iris, F value  
OPEN  
F1.7 - F16  
CLOSE  
Lens iris closed.  
<Note>  
These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris  
value. When the iris is being overridden, they blink.  
Z00 - Z99  
Zoom degree is indicated. This indication is not provided for a lens that does  
not return the zoom position, even if the indication is set to ON.  
Zoom indication  
48  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
P-REC (blink)  
Indicated while pre-recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2  
card. If the USER switch is set to perform the PRE REC function, either “P-  
REC OFF” or the specified duration “1s - 8/15s” is displayed when the PRE  
RECORDING mode is switched by pressing the USER switch.  
If a video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional accessory) is attached, the  
remaining free space on the SD Memory card will be displayed when the  
MODE CHECK button is pressed during proxy recording.  
PRE RECORDING  
indication/  
SD memory card  
remaining free space  
(when MODE CHECK  
is being performed)  
[SD]  
__h __m  
ID  
The ID is set to be superimposed on the video from the camera.  
ID record indication  
Battery type  
PRO14 - AC_ADPT  
Battery type, selected through a menu option. “AC_ADPT” indicates when an  
external DC power supply has been input.  
4
__._V  
___%  
EMP  
Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt  
Digital battery remaining level, as a percentage  
Digital battery empty.  
Battery remaining  
level/voltage  
MAX  
Digital battery fully charged.  
REC  
The indication stays illuminated during recording. This is displayed when the  
menu option REC TALLY of the SYSTEM MODE is set to “CHAR”.  
This can also be displayed during the recording using the AJ-SPC700P alone.  
This is displayed when the menu option REC STATUS of the VF INDICATOR2  
is set to “ON”.  
Camera-recorder  
REC indication  
___min  
The indication “___min” stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks  
when the remaining level is near zero.  
When the card space is used up, “END” comes on.  
The P2 card is write-protected.  
P2 card remaining  
free space  
END  
WP  
LOOP  
The camera-recorder is in LOOP REC mode. When loop recording cannot be  
performed, for example because the P2 card has no free space, the indication  
blinks.  
INFO P2  
_/_  
P2 card being recognised.  
Total free space/capacities of the P2 cards (when MODE CHECK is being  
performed).  
<Note>  
When the menu option P2 CARD REMAIN is set to “ONE CARD”, the number  
of the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated, together with the  
remaining space.  
For more information, see [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity  
Indication] (page 50).  
___min  
The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the  
remaining free space (when MODE CHECK is being performed) are  
indicated. In LOOP REC mode, the minimum guaranteed recording time is  
indicated. This indication also appears when the target P2 card has been  
switched with a user button.  
The minimum guaranteed recording time refers to the sum, at the time loop  
recording is stopped, of the remaining free space of available P2 cards,  
except for the card with the largest remaining free space.  
[1]  
P2 card remaining  
free space (when  
MODE CHECK is  
being performed)  
Example: If three P2 cards are available, with remaining space of eight  
minutes, five minutes and two minutes respectively, then the  
minimum guaranteed recording time is seven minutes.  
S
B
SB  
Super iris ON.  
Super black ON.  
Super iris and super black both ON.  
Super iris ON/super  
black ON  
_._K  
Color temperature assigned to A, B, and PRE of the WHITE BAL switch (this  
is a value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu  
option). The indication is not provided in ATW mode.  
Color temperature  
ꢅ1/__._  
1/100 - 1/2000  
SUPER V  
Shutter speed set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
Shutter speed fixed.  
Shutter speed set to SUPER V (high vertical resolution mode).  
Shutter speed/mode  
49  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication  
Status of  
AJ-SPC700P  
Menu option  
P2 CARD REMAIN*  
P2 card remaining free space  
indication  
P2 card remaining free space  
indication (during MODE CHECK)  
Recording status  
Under normal  
conditions  
Other than LOOP TOTAL  
REC mode  
The total remaining free space of all Not provided  
P2 cards loaded in the P2 card slots  
is indicated in minutes.  
Example: 30min  
ONE CARD  
The number of the P2 card slot  
holding the target P2 card, together  
with that card’s remaining free space  
indicated in minutes.  
Not provided  
Example:  
8min  
[1]  
OFF  
LOOP REC mode TOTAL/ONE CARD  
OFF  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Indicated as [LOOP]  
Not provided  
During MODE  
CHECK  
Other than LOOP TOTAL/ONE CARD/ The total remaining free space and  
The number of the P2 card slot  
holding the target P2 card, together  
with that card’s remaining free space,  
indicated in minutes.  
REC mode  
OFF  
capacities of all P2 cards loaded in  
the P2 card slots are indicated in  
minutes.  
Example: 20/40  
Example:  
8min  
[1]  
LOOP REC mode  
Indicated as [LOOP]  
The minimum guaranteed recording  
time is indicated in minutes.  
Example: 7min  
*The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the <VF INDICATOR2> screen, which is accessible from the VF page.  
Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen  
Selectable  
Provided when  
between on and the appropriate Provided during  
off through menu  
options  
Provided during  
playback  
Selectable  
1
status is  
encountered.  
MODE CHECK*  
Extender  
n
–
n
–
z
n
n
n
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
–
–
MODE CHECK indication area  
Camera warning and report area  
User button functions  
Filter position  
–
n
n
–
–
–
–
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
–
WHITE BAL switch position  
Gain value  
–
–
–
–
System information and warnings  
Voice memo indication  
Audio input channel and level meter  
Time code indication  
DV format indication  
Iris override indication  
Iris, F value  
n
n
–
n
n
–
–
n
n
–
n
n
–
–
Zoom indication  
–
–
PRE RECORDING indication/  
SD memory card remaining free  
space (MODE CHECK)  
–
n
z
–
–
ID record indication  
–
–
n
–
z
z
z
z
z
–
–
–
–
–
–
Battery type  
n
n
n
n
Battery remaining level/voltage  
Camera-recorder REC indication  
P2 card remaining free space  
n
n
n
–
n
–
P2 card remaining free space  
(MODE CHECK)  
–
–
z
n
–
Super iris ON/super black ON  
Color temperature  
n
n
n
n
n
n
z
z
z
n
n
n
–
–
–
Shutter speed/mode  
*1 n: Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to OFF, which can be found in the <MODE CHK IND> screen, accessible from the  
VF page.  
z: Provided regardless of the menu option setting.  
50  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-7-4 Display Modes and Setting  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ',63/$<ꢀ!  
Changes/adjustment Result  
Messages  
ꢀ',63ꢀ&21',7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ',63ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ9)ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ<  
ꢀ9)ꢀ'7/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢉꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢍꢈꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢔꢆꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6327  
ꢀ/2:ꢀ/,*+7ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢆꢇ  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ0(18ꢀ',63ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢆꢈ0ꢀ,1',&$725ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0$5.(5ꢌ&+$5ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈꢇ  
The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to  
indicate changes to settings and adjustment results may be  
limited, or set not to appear, through the menu option DISP  
MODE. This menu option can be found in the <VF  
DISPLAY> screen, which is accessible from the VF page.  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [4-6-2 Setting  
Menu Options].  
4
Settings Change/adjustment Result Messages and DISP MODE Settings  
DISP MODE  
settings  
Message appears when:  
Message  
1
2
3
CC/ND filter changed.  
FILTER: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4)  
GAIN: n dB  
n
n
z
Gain changed.  
n
n
n
n
n
z
z
z
z
(n=–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)  
WHITE BAL switch re-positioned.  
WHITE: n (n=A, B, PRE)  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch positioned at [AUTO AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
KNEE] or [OFF].  
SS:  
1/100 (or 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
ꢅ1/__._)  
Shutter speed/mode changed.  
n
z
z
White balance adjusted (AWB performed).  
Black balance adjusted (ABB performed).  
Extender selected.  
Example: AWB A OK 3.2 K  
Example: ABB OK  
n
n
n
n
n
n
z
z
n
z
n
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Example: EXTENDER ON  
Example: UM: S.GAIN 30 dB  
Example: MKR: A  
USER button selected.  
MARKER SELECT button selected.  
Iris being overridden.  
Example: ++ F 5.6  
z: Message appears.  
n: Message does not appear.  
51  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-7-5 Setting the Marker Displays  
Markers  
The center, safety zone, safety zone area and frame markers  
Center marker  
may be set to ON or OFF, along with specifications of the  
marker types. To set and select markers, go to the <VF  
MARKER> screen from the VF page and select the  
appropriate options.  
Safety zone  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [4-6-2 Setting  
Menu Options].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ0$5.(5ꢀ!  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
0.5ꢅ$  
ꢀ7$%/(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ$  
ꢀ&(17(5ꢀ0$5.ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀ6$)(7<ꢀ=21(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ  
ꢀ6$)(7<ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢕꢈꢇ  
ꢀ)5$0(ꢀ6,*ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢊꢅꢁ  
ꢀ)5$0(ꢀ0$5.ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)/$0(ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉꢆ  
The view angle specified through the menu option  
FRAME SIG is displayed.  
4-7-7 Checking Return Video Signal in the  
Viewfinder  
<Note>  
The indication MKR:A at the upper right of the screen shows  
the current indication status. To view TABLE B, press the  
MARKER SELECT button. This changes the indication to  
MKR:B, allowing you to view the settings.  
The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is  
held down.  
To enable this capability, select CAM RET for the menu  
option RET SW. This option can be found in the <SW  
MODE> screen, which is accessible from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
4-7-6 Marker Check Screen Displays  
(MARKER SELECT button function)  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view  
the marker settings of the AJ-SPC700P.  
ꢄꢀ6:ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the camera-  
recorder switches the marker indication as follows.  
ꢄ
ꢀ5(7ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ5(&ꢀ&+(&.  
ꢀ6ꢂ%/.ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢎꢉꢈ  
ꢀ$872ꢀ.1((ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Marker A ꢀ Marker B ꢀ No marker  
ꢀ6+'ꢖ$%%ꢀ6:ꢀ&7/ꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ%$56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6037(  
ꢀ6ꢂ*$,1ꢀ2))ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ/ꢌ0ꢌ+  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ'$7$ꢀ6$9(ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+.ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢅ5ꢂ5(9,(:  
ꢀ$63(&7ꢀ&219ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ648((=(  
If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to 16:9 as the  
information of Marker A and 4:3 as the information of Marker  
B, then the 16:9 and 4:3 view angles can easily be checked  
with the button, as required.  
MARKER SELECT button  
52  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-8 Adjusting and setting the LCD  
5
Through the menu option LCD MON CHAR, specify  
whether or not the LCD should display the same  
characters as the viewfinder.  
This menu option can be found in the <OUTPUT SEL>  
screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
monitor  
Using the LCD Monitor  
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch of the AJ-SPC700P.  
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow ꢀ direction to  
open the LCD monitor.  
ꢄ287387ꢀ6(/!  
ꢀ9,'(2ꢀ287ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢅ9%6  
ꢀ287387ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(18ꢀ21/<  
4
ꢄ
ꢀ/&'ꢀ021ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ9)ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ((ꢌ3%  
ꢀ7+80%1$,/ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
<Notes>  
z When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is  
shut tight.  
z In an environment with sudden temperature changes,  
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface  
of the monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture  
with a soft, dry cloth.  
z When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video  
image in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker  
immediately after the power is turned on. Once the  
interior of the camera-recorder warms up, the LCD  
monitor delivers normal brightness.  
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most  
convenient viewing.  
The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the  
lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.  
Self-portrait Shooting  
<Note>  
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees  
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF SHOOT  
to “MIRROR”, to horizontally flip the video image on the LCD  
display, and allow you to view a mirror image while shooting.  
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is  
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.  
The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the <LCD  
MONITOR> screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not allow undue  
force to be applied to the monitor (when it is open).  
<Note>  
When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards you  
with the menu option SELF SHOOT to “MIRROR”, the LCD  
monitor does not provide the same status indication as the  
viewfinder, regardless of the setting for the menu option LCD  
MON CHAR.  
4
The options BRIGHTNESS, COLOR LEVEL, and  
CONTRAST show respectively the brightness, color  
level and contrast of the screen. These options can be  
found in the <LCD MONITOR> screen, which is  
accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
ꢄ
ꢄ/&'ꢀ021,725!  
ꢀ%5,*+71(66ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢈ  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢈ  
ꢀ&2175$67ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢈ  
ꢀ%$&./,*+7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ6(/)ꢀ6+227ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0,5525  
ꢀ$63(&7ꢀ&219ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ648((=(  
53  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-9-2 Selecting Video Output Signals  
4-9 Menu-driven Function Setup  
You need to select the signals to be output from the VIDEO  
OUT connector.  
Each function is set up using the menu system.  
Select the video output signal on the menu option VIDEO  
OUT SEL.  
4-9-1 Setting the Switchover of USER SW  
GAIN  
Use the menu option OUTPUT CHAR to select the character  
contents to be superimposed onto the video output.  
These options can be found in the OUTPUT SEL screen,  
which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
For more information, see [8-2-4 OUTPUT SEL].  
In addition to the standard L/M/H gain mode, the AJ-  
SPC700P supports an S.GAIN (super gain) mode with more  
than 30-dB gain-up.  
To make use of this feature, you need to specify desired  
gains through the menu option S.GAIN.  
The menu options can be found in the <USER SW GAIN>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION  
page.  
ꢄ
ꢄ287387ꢀ6(/!  
ꢀ9,'(2ꢀ287ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢅ9%6  
ꢀ287387ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(18ꢀ21/<  
ꢀ/&'ꢀ021ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ9)ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ((ꢌ3%  
ꢀ7+80%1$,/ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ*$,1ꢀ!  
ꢀ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ
_
ꢁꢈE%  
ꢀ
_
ꢁꢋE%  
4-9-3 Selecting Function for the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL Control  
The FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control can be assigned the  
function of adjusting the recording level.  
Settings Options and Usage  
S.GAIN:  
Gain-ups with _ marks enabled.  
Gain-ups without _ marks disabled.  
To specify whether or not the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control  
is effective on the channels set to accept input signals, use  
the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2.  
These options can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen,  
which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
For more information, see [8-6-4 MIC/AUDIO1].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢉꢀ!  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢃꢆ0ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ&+  
ꢀ7(67ꢀ721(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
54  
         
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
NEWS-G:  
Function of switching on and off News  
Gamma assigned.  
<Note>  
4-9-4 Assigning Functions to USER  
MAIN, USER1 and USER2 Buttons  
News Gamma is capable of reproducing  
shades without whiteout or blackout. This is  
useful for such operations as news shooting.  
To turn on/off News Gamma using the USER  
button which is assigned NEWS-G, the menu  
option GAMMA MODE SEL must be set to  
“STD1” or “STD2”.  
The USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 buttons can be  
assigned user-selected functions.  
To select desired functions, use the menu options USER  
MAIN SW, USER1 SW and USER2 SW. These options can  
be found in the <USER SW> screen, which is accessible  
from the CAM OPERATION page.  
This option can be found in the <GAMMA>  
screen, which is accessible from the PAINT  
page.  
4
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0$,1ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6/27ꢀ6(/  
ꢀ86(5ꢉꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ86(5ꢃꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ,1+  
AUDIO CH1: Function of switching the input signal source  
for Audio Channel 1 assigned.  
Pressing the button switches the input signal  
in the following order: FRONT ꢀ W.L. ꢀ  
REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can  
also be used to change the input signal: later  
specification takes precedence.  
AUDIO CH2: Function of switching the input signal source  
for Audio Channel 2 assigned.  
Pressing the button switches the input signal  
in the following order: FRONT ꢀ W.L. ꢀ  
REAR. Note that the AUDIO IN switch can  
also be used to change the input signal: later  
specification takes precedence.  
Function of the REC START/STOP button  
assigned.  
Function of the RET button at the lens  
assigned.  
Selectable Functions  
INH:  
No function assigned.  
S.GAIN:  
S.IRIS:  
S.GAIN function assigned.  
Super Iris function assigned.  
This is useful for backlight compensation.  
Iris Override function assigned.  
REC SW:  
RET SW:  
I.OVR:  
The target (reference) value in Auto Iris mode  
must be changed.  
To change the target value, put the AJ-  
SPC700P into this mode and press the JOG  
dial button. Turn the JOG dial button clockwise  
or anti-clockwise to change the value. The iris  
indication section of the viewfinder screen  
displays “+”, “+ +”, “–”, or “– –”.  
When the desired value is displayed, stop  
turning the JOG dial button. Then, press the  
dial button to accept that value.  
SLOT SEL: Function of switching the target P2 card  
among multiple cards assigned.  
PRE REC:  
USB:  
PRE RECORDING switch ON/switch OFF  
function assigned.  
USB Drive Mode switch ON/switch OFF  
function assigned.  
4-9-5 Setting Color Temperature Manually  
Note that once the mode is cancelled or the  
power is turned off the original reference value  
will be used again.  
The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the  
color temperature. Manual color temperature settings can be  
performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions:  
PRST, A and B.  
To enable manual color temperature setting, the menu  
options AWB A and AWB B must be set to VAR.  
The color temperature is set using the menu options COLOR  
TEMP PRE, COLOR TEMP A, and COLOR TEMP B.  
These options can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE  
MODE> screen, which is accessible from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
+:  
+ +:  
–:  
Iris opens up by 0.5.  
Iris opens up by 1.  
Iris closes down by 0.5.  
Iris closes down by 1.  
– –:  
No indication: The reference value is used.  
Super Black function assigned.  
This function lowers the black level to the  
pedestal level or below.  
Black Stretch function assigned.  
This function emphasises the black shades.  
S.BLK:  
B.STR:  
ATW:  
Auto-tracking  
assigned.  
Function of indicating the brightness level of  
the center marker assigned.  
white  
balance  
function  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀ,1+ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+2&./(66ꢀ$:%ꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃꢆꢇ  
ꢀ$:% $%%ꢀ2))6(7ꢀꢀꢅ2))  
Y GET:  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ35(ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$7:ꢀ63(('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
55  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-10-2 Formatting, Writing and Reading  
an SD memory card  
4-10 Handling data  
Setting Data Using an SD memory card  
To format an SD memory card, write settings data or read  
data on an SD memory card, navigate the menu to the <SD  
CARD READ/ WRITE> screen from the FILE page.  
An SD memory card (optional accessory) can be used as a  
setup card that stores up to eight files of settings menu  
specifications.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state.  
Regarding SD memory cards, please see <Cautions in using  
SD memory cards> (page 17).  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
4-10-1 Handling SD memory cards  
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either  
before or after the power is turned on.  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
To insert an SD memory card  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and insert an SD memory  
card (optional accessory) into the SD memory card slot with  
the notch upward. Close the lid.  
For an SD memory card formatted with a device that does  
not support SD standards, the message “FORMAT ERROR”  
appears at the upper right of the screen. In this case,  
reformat the card as follows. Note that the indication  
“FORMAT ERROR” does not disappear if the SD memory  
card is replaced with this menu page open. When the SD  
memory card is replaced, perform TITLE READ.  
To format an SD memory card  
<Note>  
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail  
screen. For more information, see [6-15 Formatting SD  
memory cards].  
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
menu option CARD CONFIG.  
<Note>  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side  
facing the slot. If the card is hard to insert, it may be reversed  
or upside down. Do not force it into the slot. Check the card  
before re-inserting it.  
To remove the SD memory card  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and ensure that the BUSY  
lamp is not illuminated. Then, further depress the SD  
memory card towards the main unit. This releases the SD  
memory card from the insertion slot. Take hold of the SD  
memory card and remove it. Close the lid.  
ꢀ&21),*"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢄ
SD memory cards must not be used or stored in  
an environment where they may be  
z Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;  
z Exposed to water droplets; or  
z Electrically charged.  
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted into  
the AJ-SPC700P with the lid closed.  
56  
       
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
To write set data on an SD memory card  
4
To format the SD memory card, turn the JOG dial  
button to move the cursor to YES. Then, press the dial  
button.  
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
When the SD memory card has been formatted, the  
following message appears:  
To select a file number  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [W. SELECT]. Then, press the dial button.  
4
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&21),*ꢀ2.  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
The card will not be formatted if the following message  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
Error message  
CONFIG NG  
Remedy  
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number (1 -  
8). Then, press the dial button.  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
CONFIG NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace the card.  
To give the selected file a title  
(SD memory card cannot be  
formatted.)  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [TITLE:].  
CONFIG NG  
Remove the card and cancel the  
protect.  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD memory card is write-  
protected.)  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
CONFIG NG  
Example: The SD memory card  
is not accessible because it is  
being played back.  
After the operation in process,  
format the card.  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible).  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
5
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPC700P is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
<Note>  
5
Press the JOG dial button. This moves the cursor to the  
entry area, putting the AJ-SPC700P in entry mode.  
If an SD memory card is inserted or removed with the  
<SD CARD READ/WRITE> screen open, the data title  
cannot be edited.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press  
the JOG dial button.  
Edit the data title.  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢁ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
57  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
The data will not be written if any of the following messages  
6
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character  
appears.  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
The characters that appear are switched in the  
following order:  
Error message  
WRITE NG  
Remedy  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
Space:  
†
Ð
WRITE NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(SD memory card not properly SPC700P.  
formatted.)  
The card has not been  
formatted using the AJ-  
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
0 to 9  
Replace the card.  
WRITE NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace the card.  
Symbols:  
', >, <, /, -  
(SD memory card not writable.)  
7
8
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired  
character.  
WRITE NG  
Remove the card and disable  
the protect.  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD memory card write-  
protected.)  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next  
digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 6 - 7 to set  
characters (up to eight characters).  
WRITE NG  
Example: The SD memory card  
is not accessible because it is  
being played back.  
After the operation in process,  
format the card.  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible).  
To write data on a selected file  
WRITENG  
CARD FULL  
(SD memory card has no free  
space.)  
The card is not writable because  
it has no free space. Delete  
unwanted files or replace the  
card with a new one.  
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button to move  
the cursor to [:].  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
13  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
When the data has been written, the following message  
appears:  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢁ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
10  
11  
12  
Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the  
option [TITLE:].  
:5,7(ꢀ2.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [WRITE].  
14  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPC700P is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7,7/(ꢅ  
58  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
To read data on an SD memory card  
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
When the data has been read, the following message  
appears:  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [SD CARD READ/WRITE]. Then, press the dial  
button.  
To select a file number  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
menu option [R. SELECT]. Then, press the dial button.  
4
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ2.  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
The data will not be read if any of the following messages  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
Error message  
READ NG  
Remedy  
Insert an SD memory card.  
NO CARD  
(No SD memory card inserted.)  
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number (1 -  
8). Then, press the dial button.  
READ NG  
The card has not been  
formatted using the AJ-  
(SD memory card not properly SPC700P.  
FORMAT ERROR  
To read data on a selected file  
formatted.)  
Replace the card.  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
(No file found.)  
Write file data.  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [READ].  
READ NG  
ERROR  
(SD memory card not readable.)  
Only data written with the AJ-  
SPC700P is readable.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢄ
READ NG  
Example: The SD memory card  
is not accessible because it is  
being played back.  
After the operation in process,  
read data.  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD memory card not  
accessible.)  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢍꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢀꢀꢔꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
7
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu will be replaced by status indications  
for the AJ-SPC700P.  
5
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
59  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-10-3 How to Use the User Data  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the settings data into the user area of the  
internal memory of the AJ-SPC700P.  
It is possible to transfer settings and other data to the user  
area of the internal memory of the AJ-SPC700P.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup  
state.  
5
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To write data, go to the <INITIALIZE> screen from the FILE  
page. To read the written user data, go to the <SCENE>  
screen from the FILE page.  
To read written user data  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option READ USER DATA.  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
3
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
The data written in the user area of the internal memory  
of the AJ-SPC700P is read to complete the setting.  
To write settings data in the user area  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <INITIALIZE> screen.  
The set user data may be also read without navigating the  
menu.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option WRITE USER DATA.  
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
3
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
WHITE BAL  
Switch  
3
With the AUTO W/B BAL switch flipped up, turn on the  
POWER switch.  
This resets all settings for USER menu options to their  
defaults.  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
60  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
4-10-4 How to Use Scene File Data  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the setting data into the scene file area of  
the AJ-SPC700P internal memory.  
It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area  
of the internal memory of the AJ-SPC700P, or to read data  
written in this area. Four types of scene files are available.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup  
state.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
TITLEs 1 - 4 are factory-assigned the defaults for the AJ-  
SPC700P.  
To change the settings, go to the <SCENE> screen from the  
FILE page.  
4
To write settings data for scene files  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
SCENE SEL option.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the  
option WRITE.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7,7/(ꢅ  
61  
 
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
To read settings data for scene files  
To return data for scene files to their defaults  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option SCENE SEL.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option SCENE SEL.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select the scene file that  
you want to reset.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
READ option.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [RESET].  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀ5(6(7"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the AJ-SPC700P is read to complete the  
setting.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the AJ-SPC700P is reset to the defaults.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
62  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording (continued)  
To title settings data for scene files  
10  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following  
message:  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the  
option [TITLEs 1 - 4] for the appropriate scene file.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
4
ꢄ
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
7,7/(ꢅ  
11  
12  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES.  
Then, press the dial button.  
This writes the title into the scene file area of the AJ-  
SPC700P internal memory.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the title  
entry area, putting the AJ-SPC700P in entry mode.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
4-10-5 Resetting Menu Option Settings to  
Defaults  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
The menu settings can be reset to their defaults.  
To reset the settings to their defaults, select the menu option  
READ FACTORY DATA in the <INITIALIZE> screen, which is  
accessible from the FILE page.  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
All settings will be reset to their defaults.  
4
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character  
appears.  
The characters that appear are switched in the  
following order:  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
Space:  
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
0 to 9  
Symbols:  
', >, <, /, -  
<Note>  
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired  
character.  
This operation does not delete the scene file, lens file, and  
the information stored as the user data.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next  
digit (clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 - 5 to set  
characters (up to eight characters).  
4-10-6 Lens File Data  
The AJ-SPC700P is capable of correcting the lens white  
shading. This lens white shading correction may be stored  
as lens file data (maximum number of data sets is eight).  
Lens file data allows you to quickly perform a proper white  
shading adjustment, even when the lens is replaced.  
For more information on reading/writing data, see [5-3  
Mounting the lens and Performing the Flange Back and  
White Shading Adjustments].  
7
8
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button to move  
the cursor to [:].  
Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the  
options TITLEs 1 - 4.  
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the  
option WRITE.  
63  
   
Chapter 5 Preparation  
5-1 Power Supply  
2
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the  
arrow.  
A battery pack or an external DC power supply can be used  
as this unit’s power supply.  
Using a Battery Pack  
Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used:  
• Anton/Bauer  
• IDX  
• PACO  
• Sony  
<Notes>  
Release lever  
z Other batteries may be used by changing the menu  
setting, but system compatibility is not guaranteed.  
z Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before  
using it. (Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction  
manual for information about charging.)  
<For your information>  
Removing the battery pack  
Completely push down and hold the release lever on  
the battery holder. Then, slide the battery pack in the  
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever  
down.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ%$77(5<ꢌ3ꢃ&$5'ꢀ!  
ꢀ%$77(5<ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ352ꢉꢊ  
ꢀ(;7ꢀ'&ꢀ,1ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ$&ꢎ$'37  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ&$1&(/ꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ5(0$,1ꢀ)8//ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢍꢈꢇ  
3
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/  
P2CARD> screen in the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Please refer to [8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1] for more  
information.  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ7,0(ꢀꢀꢅꢃNJO  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5(0$,1ꢌ  
„
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁNJOꢌ  
„ꢀ  
The following Anton/Bauer batteries can be  
used:  
• PRO14  
• TRIM14  
5-1-1 Mounting the Battery and Setting  
the Battery Type  
• HYTRON50  
• HYTRON100  
• HYTRON120  
• DIONIC90  
• DIONIC160  
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery Pack  
1
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
Power supply output  
connector for lighting  
<Note>  
To use DIONIC, please set it as DIONIC90.  
Anton/Bauer  
Battery Pack  
Lighting control  
switch  
<For your information>  
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power  
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting control  
switch, which are convenient when attaching a light. Please  
contact Anton/Bauer for information about the lighting  
system.  
64  
     
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
When using a BP-90 type battery pack  
3
Connect the battery pack plug to the socket inside the  
battery case, and insert the battery pack into the case.  
CAUTION:  
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
service personnel only. To reduce the risk of fire or  
electric shock do not perform any servicing other  
than that contained in the operating instructions  
unless you are qualified to do so.  
1
Remove the battery holder.  
5
Label  
surface  
<Note>  
Battery holder  
Make sure you turn OFF the camera-recorder power  
before connecting or disconnecting the plug.  
4
Setting the battery type.  
2
Attaching the battery case to the camera-recorder.  
ꢀ Connect the cable on the camera-recorder to the  
cable on the battery case (BP-90 type).  
ꢁ Using a screwdriver, secure the battery case (BP-90  
type) to the camera-recorder.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/  
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Please refer to [8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1] for more  
information.  
Open the cover and lift the rubber cap so that the  
screw tightening hole is visible. Tighten the screws  
to secure the battery case to the camera-recorder.  
Be sure to fully tighten the screws.  
<Notes>  
z Do not use excess force when lifting the rubber caps  
forcibly.  
z Take special care not to pinch the cable.  
Connect  
Battery Case  
(For BP-90 type)  
65  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Using an NP-1 type battery pack  
When using a V-mount type battery pack  
Mount the V-mount adapter plate.  
Insert the plate and slide it in the direction of the arrow.  
CAUTION:  
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified  
service personnel only. To reduce the risk of fire or  
electric shock do not perform any servicing other  
than that contained in the operating instructions  
unless you are qualified to do so.  
1
2
Remove the battery holder.  
Mount the NP-1 type battery case on the camera-  
recorder.  
ꢀ Tighten the mounting screws.  
ꢁ Tighten the power contact screws.  
Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the  
direction of the arrow.  
ꢂ Align the holes in the bottom part (metal part) of the  
cover with the holes in the case, and secure the  
cover with the screw.  
<Note>  
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to  
pinch the connection cord.  
Battery Case (for NP-1 type)  
3
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/  
P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
When using a battery not listed under BATTERY  
SELECT: If it is a NiCD battery, select “NiCd14(14V)”,  
“NiCd13(13V)”, or “NiCd12(12V)”, depending on the  
battery voltage. Set the other items according to the  
battery properties. If it is not a NiCd battery, select  
TYPE A or TYPE B and set the other items according to  
the battery properties.  
Please refer to [8-6-3 BATTERY SETTING2] for more  
information.  
<Note>  
For information about the V-mount adapter plate,  
please contact the store where you purchased the  
camera-recorder.  
66  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-1-2 Use of the external DC power supply  
5-2 Mounting the Viewfinder and  
Adjusting its Position  
1
Connect the external DC power supply to the DC IN  
socket on the unit.  
Please refer to the viewfinder instruction manual.  
Note: A slide rail is required to mount any viewfinder other  
than models AJ-VF15B or AJ-VF20WB.  
z If you need to buy a slide rail, please contact the store  
where you purchased the camera-recorder and tell them  
that the slide rail is a “repair part”.  
Slide rail (VFC3995)  
Screws (XBS3+8VZ)  
Mounting the Slide Rail  
5
1
Undo the upper two screws for AJ-VF15 or AJ-VF20W,  
and remove the mounting unit.  
DC IN Socket  
Leave the screws attached to the mounting unit.  
External DC  
power supply  
Mounting unit  
Screws  
2
3
Turn ON the power switch of the external DC power  
supply. (If the power switch is available on the external  
DC power supply)  
Turn ON the POWER switch on the unit.  
Rush current may occur at the time for turning on the  
power of the unit. We recommend using an external DC  
power supply capable to secure double or more  
capacity of the total power consumption of the devices  
connected to the unit such as the viewfinder and lights.  
Use a DC cable with a capacity of 10A or more.  
2
Mount the slide rail, then tighten the two screws.  
Slide rail  
Confirm the pin arrangements of the DC output connector  
of the external DC power supply and the DC IN socket on  
the unit, and connect the proper polarities to each other.  
If the +12 V power supply is connected to the GND  
connector in error, it may cause a fire or failure of the unit.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
1
2, 3  
4
GND  
—
4
1
2
3
+12V  
DC IN Socket  
<Notes>  
z If both the battery pack and the external DC power  
supply are connected, the electric power is supplied  
from the external DC power supply. While the  
external DC power supply is used, the battery can be  
mounted and removed on/from the unit.  
z
When the external DC power supply is used, ensure that  
the power switch of the external DC power supply is  
turned on first and then the POWER switch on the unit is  
turned on. In the case of the reverse operation, a  
malfunction may occur on the unit since the output  
voltage of the external DC power supply is raised slowly.  
z When connecting a battery to the DC IN socket,  
select the battery type listed under EXT DC IN  
SELECT. Select EXT DC IN SELECT from the  
<BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN  
OPERATION page. In this case, however, the %  
display is disabled, even when using a digital battery.  
67  
   
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back  
5-3 Mounting the lens and  
Performing the Flange Back  
and White Shading  
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide-  
angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange  
back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the image  
formation surface).  
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be re-  
adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the  
camera.  
Adjustments  
Mounting the Lens  
1
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount  
cap.  
<Note>  
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions  
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.  
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.  
Make sure you connect the lens cable.  
Lens Clamping  
Lever  
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.  
Mount Cap  
2
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the top  
center of the lens mount with the center mark of the  
lens.  
Approximately 3m  
Mark  
3
4
Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from  
the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an  
appropriate video output level.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters or the  
shutter.  
3
Lower the lens clamping lever to clamp the lens.  
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.  
<Note>  
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.  
5
6
7
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position, either  
manually or by electric drive.  
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and  
turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus.  
4
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and plug it  
into the LENS connector.  
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position and turn  
the F.f ring to bring the chart into focus.  
While focusing, take care not to move the distance ring.  
8
9
Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.  
LENS Connector  
5
Adjust the lens flange back.  
<Notes>  
z Please refer to the lens instruction manual for  
guidance on lens handling.  
z When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to  
protect the device.  
68  
   
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Adjusting the Lens White Shading  
8
ꢀ Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to A or B, and  
execute Auto White Balance (AWB) with the AUTO  
W/B BAL switch.  
ꢁ Next, execute Auto Black Balance (ABB) with the  
AUTO W/B BAL switch.  
Take the following steps to adjust the white shading:  
<Note>  
Vertical coloring may occur near the open position of the  
lens iris, even after adjusting the white shading. This  
phenomenon, however, is a characteristic of the lens or  
optical system. It does not indicate a malfunction.  
Repeat Auto White Balance (ABB) with the AUTO W/  
B BAL switch.  
9
Repeat the adjustment described in Step 7.  
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.  
Be sure to connect the lens cable.  
10  
Activate the MENU and go to the MAINTENANCE page  
to open the <WHITE SHADING> screen.  
Set the electronic shutter to [OFF], the gain to [L (0dB)],  
and the ASPECT option to “16:9”. Select the ASPECT  
option from the SYSTEM MODE screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
5
11  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to  
DETECTION (V.SAW). Then, press the JOG Dial  
button to execute white shading compensation.  
3
4
If the lens has an extender, disable the extender  
feature.  
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ6+$',1*ꢀ!  
ꢀ&255(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢄ
ꢀ'(7(&7,21ꢀꢒ9ꢀ6$:ꢓ  
Operate the MENU and go to the PAINT page to open  
the <GAMMA> screen. Confirm that the GAMMA  
MODE SEL is set to STD. From the VF page, open the  
<VF DISPLAY> screen to confirm that ZEBRA1  
DETECT, ZEBRA2 DETECT, and ZEBRA2 are set as  
shown in the diagram below. If they are not, correct the  
settings and then close the MENU screen.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ',63/$<ꢀ!  
12  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
ꢀ',63ꢀ&21',7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ',63ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ9)ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ<  
ꢀ9)ꢀ'7/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢉꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢍꢈꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢔꢆꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6327  
ꢀ/2:ꢀ/,*+7ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢆꢇ  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ0(18ꢀ',63ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢆꢈ0ꢀ,1',&$725ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0$5.(5ꢌ&+$5ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈꢇ  
ꢀ'(7(&7"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
5
6
Set the Viewfinder ZEBRA switch to ON.  
ꢄ
Aim the lens at a sheet of white paper that has no color  
shading.  
13  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES].  
Then press the JOG Dial button.  
[ACTIVE] appears on the screen to indicate that the  
white shading automatic adjustment is running.  
[W-SHD OK] appears when the adjustment is  
completed.  
<Note>  
Flickering naturally occurs when fluorescent, mercury  
or other such lamps are used for lighting. Therefore,  
use a light source that does not flicker, such as sunlight  
or halogen lamps.  
7
Set the lens iris to manual and adjust the lens iris so  
that the ZEBRA pattern covers the entire screen.  
Make sure that the lens iris is set between F4 and F11.  
<Note>  
This compensation may not be possible when [LEVEL  
OVER] is displayed, depending on the KNEE setting. In  
this case, first narrow the lens iris or set the OUTPUT  
switch AUTO KNEE to OFF. Next, activate the MENU to  
open the PAINT screen. From the PAINT screen, open  
the <KNEE/LEVEL> screen and set MANUAL KNEE to  
OFF. Then repeat Steps 4 to 9.  
<Notes>  
z The ZEBRA pattern will not cover the entire screen if  
the lighting is uneven. In this case, adjust the lighting  
(e.g., change the position of the light source).  
z Even if the lens iris is not set between F4 and F11,  
adjust the lighting (e.g., change the position of the  
light source).  
After [W-SHD OK] is displayed, re-set MANUAL KNEE  
back to ON.  
z Make sure that the electronic shutter is set to OFF.  
14  
If the lens has an extender or a ratio converter, enable  
the feature and repeat Steps 7 to 13 for each feature.  
Three patterns of compensation values (with an extender,  
with a ratio converter, and without any features) will be  
stored as one set of lens file data in the camera-recorder.  
69  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
This completes the white shading adjustment.  
The compensation values are stored in the non-volatile  
internal memory. Therefore, re-adjusting the white shading is  
not required, even after the camera-recorder power has  
been turned off.  
6
Press the JOG Dial button again and turn it until a  
desired letter for the title appears.  
Turning the JOG Dial button changes the letter  
displayed in the following sequence:  
Space:  
†
Storing the Lens File Data  
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
The white shading compensation values can be stored in the  
internal memory as lens file data.  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
Selecting the File number  
', >, <, /, -  
1
2
Activate the MENU and go to the FILE page to open the  
<LENS> screen. Turn the JOG Dial to move the cursor  
to the item FILE NO.  
7
8
Press the JOG Dial button to confirm the letter.  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to the next  
position (to the right), and repeat Steps 6 to 7 to set the  
letters for the title. (Up to 12 letters)  
Press the JOG Dial button and FILE NO. will start  
blinking. Turn the JOG Dial button to select the desired  
lens file (1-8) to be stored.  
9
When the title input is completed, turn the JOG Dial  
button to move the cursor to the [:] position.  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
10  
11  
12  
Press the JOG Dial button. The cursor returns to  
[TITLE:].  
ꢄ
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to  
[WRITE:].  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢍꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢔꢅ  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
3
Press the JOG Dial button to confirm the lens file.  
Adding a Title to the Selected File No.  
4
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to  
[TITLE:].  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
13  
14  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES].  
Then, press the JOG Dial button.  
[WRITE OK] will appear after writing is completed,  
indicating that the set data and the title have been  
stored in the lens file area of the camera’s internal  
memory.  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢍꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢔꢅ  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operation.  
5
Press the JOG Dial button. The cursor moves to the  
title input field, and input mode is enabled.  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐꢐ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢍꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢔꢅ  
70  
 
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
Reading out the Lens File Data  
Resetting Lens File Data to Factory Standard  
Settings  
1
2
3
Select the lens file No. to read out by following Steps 1  
to 3 in the [Storing the Lens File Data] section.  
The lens file data can be reset to the standard setting values  
that were set when the camera was shipped from the factory.  
From the FILE page, open the <INITIALISE> screen.  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to  
[READ:].  
1
2
3
From the INITIALIZE screen, select [RESET LENS  
FILES].  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,6(ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
5
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
When the JOG Dial button is pressed, the message  
shown below appears.  
4
5
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES].  
Then, press the JOG Dial button.  
[READ OK] will be displayed after the stored lens file  
data has been read out.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operation.  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ$//ꢀ/(16ꢀ'$7$"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES],  
then press the JOG Dial button.  
[OK] is displayed, resetting the lens file data to the  
factory default values.  
71  
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-4 Preparing for Audio Input  
5-4-2 When Using a Wireless Receiver  
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for  
connecting audio input devices.  
When Using the Unislot Wireless Receiver  
1
Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and  
secure it with the screws.  
5-4-1 When Using the Front Microphone  
The AJ-MC700P microphone kit (optional) includes a  
microphone that can be mounted on the camera.  
1
Open the microphone holder.  
2
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [W.L.] depending on the  
audio channel to be recorded.  
2
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw.  
ClampingScrew  
3
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on  
the camera.  
MIC IN Jack  
4
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT] depending on the  
audio channel to be recorded.  
AUDIO IN  
Switch  
72  
     
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-4-3 When Using Audio Devices  
5-5 Connection between the USB  
2.0 port of the AJ-SPC700P and  
a PC  
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the  
XLR cable.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the channel to  
which the XLR cable is connected.  
By connecting the AJ-SPC700P with an external PC using  
USB 2.0, the P2 card connected to the AJ-SPC700P can be  
used as a mass storage device.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear  
panel to [LINE].  
Procedures for establishing a connection with a PC  
1
Connect the USB cable to the USB 2.0 port.  
<Notes>  
5
z The USB 2.0 cable is not included with AJ-SPC700P.  
Please use a commercially available USB 2.0 cable  
(shield with a ferrite core).  
z The length of the USB cable shall be not exceed 3  
meters. Using a USB cable whose length is greater  
than 3 meters might result in erroneous operations.  
LINE/MIC/+48V  
Selector Switch  
AUDIO IN Jack  
USB  
AUDIO IN  
Switch  
2.0 port  
2
Open the <SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page from the menu, and set USB to ON.  
ꢄꢀꢀꢄꢀ6<67(0ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ&$0  
ꢀ$63(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉꢋꢅꢕ  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈ0  
ꢀ6(7ꢀ83ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢇ  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ7$//<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ5('  
ꢀ$&&(66ꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢄ
ꢀ86%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
<Note>  
The function of the menu option USB may be assigned  
to a desired user button by using any one of the menu  
options USER MAIN SW, USER1 SW or USER2 SW.  
These options can be found in the USER SW screen,  
which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
When you establish the USB connection for the first time,  
install the accessory P2 software for AJ-SPC700P on the  
PC. Refer to the Installation Manual for the details.  
73  
     
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-6 Mounting the Camera on a  
Tripod  
<Notes>  
z A USB driver must be installed on the PC.  
z AJ-SPC700P is only applicable to USB 2.0, not to  
USB 1.1.  
z Only one AJ-SPC700P at a time must be connected  
to the PC via USB.  
z The P2 card must not be removed when it is  
connected via USB.  
z While a USB connection is established, the P2 card’s  
access LED should not be lit except when access is  
being carried out.  
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the tripod  
adapter supplied with the camera.  
1
Mount the tripod adapter on the tripod.  
Tripod Adapter  
z While the USB is turned ON, operations such as  
recording, playback and thumbnails will not be  
available.  
Pan head  
During a USB connection, “DRIVE” is lit in the status  
indication area of a display window.
ޓ
Also, “USB  
DRIVE” is displayed in the system information/warning  
area in the viewfinder.  
When the connection is not correctly established, both  
of these indications blink.  
<Note>  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
Select an appropriate hole in the adapter, taking into  
account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod  
adapter combined.  
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole  
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.  
30  
40  
OO  
-dB  
DRIVE  
13  
24  
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ V T 7 ꢁ 9 S D W @  
ꢀ
ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ % ꢁ ꢁ A )   ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢅ  
2
Mount the camera on the tripod adapter.  
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you  
hear a “click”.  
ꢁ
i
7
ꢃ
  ꢁ 6 ꢁ   ' ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ A ) ! ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢁ ꢂ ꢂ ꢂ ꢅ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ ꢁ A   # ꢁ a ( (  
ꢁ
3
There are two ways to terminate the USB mode, as  
follows:  
z Turn the POWER switch of the AJ-SPC700P OFF.  
z Set the USB to OFF from the menu operations.  
Removing the Camera from the Tripod Adapter  
Tripod Adapter  
Red Lever  
Black Lever  
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the  
direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to  
remove it.  
<Note>  
If the tripod adapter pin does not return to its original  
position after the camera has been removed, hold the red  
lever down and move the black lever in the direction of the  
arrow again, in order to return the pin to its original position.  
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin  
remains in the center.  
74  
 
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap  
5-9 Connecting the AJ-EC3P  
Extension Controller  
Shoulder Strap  
Some functions can be remote-controlled when the AJ-  
EC3P extension control unit (optional) is connected to the  
camera.  
When the AJ-EC3P is connected, the camera automatically  
enters remote control mode after the power switches of both  
the camera and the AJ-EC3P are turned ON.  
5
Press to open  
the hook.  
Controller Cable  
AJ-  
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then  
detach the strap.  
<Note>  
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.  
5-8 Attaching the Rain Cover  
ECUConnector  
AJ-EC3P  
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover  
<Notes>  
z Be sure to turn OFF both the camera and the AJ-EC3P  
power switches before connecting or disconnecting the  
controller cable.  
z If ECU DATA SAVE is set to OFF, the camera-related  
setting values, which have been adjusted or set using the  
AJ-EC3P, will be cancelled when the camera power switch  
is turned OFF. Also, the setting values cannot be written to  
an SD memory card. However, the menu settings  
performed using the AJ-EC3P can be written to an SD  
memory card. Next time the AJ-EC3P is connected, the  
setting values will return to the AJ-EC3P settings.  
ECU DATA SAVE can be selected from the <SW MODE>  
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
Tighten the cord  
z If ECU DATA SAVE is set to ON, the values adjusted or set  
using the AJ-EC3P are retained, even after the camera  
power switch is turned OFF.  
z The USER switch on the camera does not function when  
the AJ-EC3P is connected.  
z When controlling the shutter from the AJ-EC3P, the shutter  
speeds correspond to the speeds set by the menu on the  
camera, not the speeds written on the AJ-EC3P. The  
shutter speeds correspond as follows:  
Secure with the  
surface fastener  
Secure with the surface fastener  
AJ-EC3P  
Camera Shutter Speeds  
Shutter Speed Indication  
100 (60)  
120  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
250  
500  
1000  
2000  
75  
       
Chapter 5 Preparation (continued)  
5-10 Attaching the Front Audio  
Level Control Knob  
If you use the Front Audio Level control frequently, attach the  
accessory knob so that it can be easily operated.  
Knob  
Front Audio  
(Accessory)  
LevelControl  
Screw  
(Accessory)  
ÎMarks  
Screw  
Remove the screw in the center of the Front Audio Level  
control, and attach the accessory knob using the screw  
(included). When attaching the knob, be sure to align the  
marks on the control with the marks on the knob.  
76  
 
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails  
A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices created from one shooting session, together with additional  
information such as voice memos and meta data.  
The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images displayed on the  
LCD monitor:  
z Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.  
z Add a voice memo to the clip.  
z Add or delete a shot mark on the clip thumbnail.  
z Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.  
z Upload the clip meta data from an SD memory card.  
6-1 Thumbnail Manipulations Overview  
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:  
6
THUMBNAIL  
OPERATION  
PROPERTY  
DELETE  
FORMAT  
ALL CLIP  
SELECTED CLIPS  
CLIP PROPERTY  
REPAIR CLIP  
RE-CONNECTION  
COPY  
DEVICE SETUP  
EXIT  
MARKED CLIPS  
VOICE MEMO CLIPS  
META DATA  
PROXY (OPTION)  
EXIT  
CARD STATUS  
SLOT CLIPS  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MARKER IND.  
VOICE MEMO IND.  
WIDE IND.  
PROXY IND.  
DATA DISPLAY  
DATE FORMAT  
THUMBNAIL SIZE  
THUMBNAIL INIT  
EXIT  
DEVICES  
SD CARD  
META DATA  
PROXY (OPTION)  
EXIT  
PROPERTY SETUP  
EXIT  
P2 CARD CAP  
EXIT  
77  
     
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
Thumbnail  
6-2 Thumbnail Screen  
The image captured immediately after you start  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail  
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL  
button again returns the display to the regular display. When  
switching is done from the regular screen display to the  
thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed on  
the thumbnail screen.  
Also, pressing the MENU BAR button in the thumbnail  
screen moves the pointer to the menu bar and enables  
thumbnail menu manipulation.  
shooting is displayed as a thumbnail.  
Time Display  
You can set this to display the time code at the start of  
clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip recording,  
the shooting time, the shooting date or the shooting and  
date. Please refer to [6-16 Setting the Thumbnail  
Display Mode] for more information.  
The factory setting is the time code at the start of clip  
recording.  
<Note>  
With the TCG switch positioned at [SET], when the time  
code or user bits are set or when camera menus are being  
manipulated, thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
Menu Bar  
The Menu Bar includes menus for manipulating clips  
and switching/setting the thumbnail display.  
Press the MENU BAR button on the thumbnail screen to  
manipulate the menu bar. Use the cursor (ꢁꢀ) and  
SET buttons to select the menu.  
THUMBNAIL:  
To switch the thumbnail display and set the display  
mode.  
!12"  
OPERATION:  
To delete clips and format a P2 card.  
PROPERTY:  
To display clip properties and P2 card status.  
EXIT:  
!7"  
!13"  
To return the pointer to the thumbnail.  
Incomplete Clip Indicator  
Thumbnail Screen  
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple  
P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted into a P2  
card slot.  
Display Mode  
Indicates the thumbnail types displayed on the screen.  
ALL:  
Display all clips.  
Voice Memo Indicator  
SELECT: Display randomly selected clips.  
MARKER: Display clips with shot marks.  
VOICE MEMO:  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a voice memo  
attached. Please refer to [6-7 Voice Memo] for more  
information about voice memos.  
Display clips with voice memo data.  
SLOT n: Display clips in the specified P2 card.  
(n: 1 to 5, which indicates Slots 1-5.)  
Wide Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9  
aspect ratio.  
Please refer to [6-5 Switching the Thumbnail Display] for  
more information.  
Shot Mark Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark  
attached. Please refer to [6-6 Shot Mark] for more  
information about shot marks.  
Slot Number  
Indicates the P2 card in which the clip under the pointer  
is recorded. The slot number of the P2 card that  
contains the clip is displayed in yellow.  
If the clip is recorded across multiple P2 cards, all the  
slot numbers of the P2 cards that contain the clip are  
displayed.  
Defective Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may  
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down  
during recording.  
The slot numbers of the other P2 cards, if inserted, are  
displayed in white.  
A clip displayed with a yellow corrupt marker can be  
restored. Please refer to [6-9 Restoring Clips] for more  
information.  
A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker cannot be  
restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be  
deleted, format the P2 card.  
Clip Number  
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips  
recognised correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are  
allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates and  
times.  
When clips have different formats,  
instead of  
is displayed  
.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording  
formats, they are displayed in red.  
78  
 
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
Indicator for clips with proxy  
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.  
6-4 Playing Back Clips  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Indicator for edit copy clips  
This marker is displayed for clips whose edit copy  
operation was performed on the P2 deck. For more  
information on edit copy, see the AJ-SPD850 instruction  
manual.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the  
desired clip.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button, and the clip under the  
pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor.  
After playback of the clip under the pointer, subsequent  
clips are played back in order, according to when they  
were shot. The thumbnail screen returns after the last  
clip has been played back.  
6-3 Selecting Thumbnails  
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the  
thumbnail screen.  
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer (yellow  
frame) to the desired clip and press the SET button.  
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a  
blue frame. Press the SET button again to deselect the  
clip.  
<Notes>  
6
z When playing back clips, it is not necessary to  
“select” the clips (blue frames around the  
thumbnails).  
z Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be  
played.  
2
Additional clips can be selected by repeating Step 1.  
4
5
During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4C  
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4C  
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to  
return to normal playback.  
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the  
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [6-5 Switching  
the Thumbnail Display] for more information.  
During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button  
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.  
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the  
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing the  
REW button again moves the pause position to the  
beginning of the previous clip.  
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the  
pause position to the beginning of the next clip.  
MENU BAR  
Button  
6
Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops  
the playback and returns the display to the thumbnail  
screen.  
LCD Monitor  
THUMBNAIL Button  
<Note>  
When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer  
remains on the clip that was being played back,  
regardless of where the playback started. However,  
when the THUMBNAIL button is pressed to close the  
thumbnail screen, the pointer will move to the starting  
clip (i.e., the clip with the earliest recording date and  
time), not the clip on which the pointer was last  
positioned.  
CURSOR Buttons  
SET Button  
79  
   
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-5 Switching the Thumbnail Display  
6-6 Shot Mark  
The display can be switched so that only those clips  
matching the specified conditions are displayed in the  
thumbnail screen.  
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish  
this clip from the others.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
to which you want to attach a shot mark.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
Press the Shot Mark button.  
MENU BAR Button  
Shot Mark Button  
3
Move the pointer over THUMBNAIL and press the SET  
button to select it. A sub-menu appears. Switch the  
thumbnail display by selecting one of the following  
items:  
4
A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under  
the pointer.  
To delete a shot mark, reposition the pointer over the  
clip and press the Shot Mark button.  
<Notes>  
z A shot mark can be attached during recording. Please  
refer to [3-9 Shot Mark Function] for more information.  
z When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark  
from) a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with  
all these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.  
ALL CLIP:  
Display all clips.  
SELECTED CLIPS:  
Display randomly selected clips.  
MARKED CLIPS:  
Display clips with shot marks attached.  
VOICE MEMO CLIPS:  
Display clips with voice memo data attached.  
SLOT CLIPS:  
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in the  
specified slot.  
When this item is selected, SLOT1 to SLOT5 are  
displayed as a sub-menu. Select the desired slot to  
display the clips.  
SETUP:  
Please refer to [6-16 Setting the Thumbnail Display  
Mode] for information about this item.  
EXIT:  
Close the sub-menu.  
80  
       
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-7 Voice Memo  
5
Press the left/right cursor buttons (ꢁꢀ) to move the  
pointer over the still image that is related to the voice  
memo you wish to play back. Then, press the SET  
button.  
A voice memo is audio data that can be attached to the clip  
separately from the voice recorded during shooting.  
<Note>  
A voice memo can be attached during recording. Please  
refer to [3-8 Voice Memo Function] for more information.  
6
The voice memo will be played back.  
During voice memo playback, the still image related to  
the voice memo is displayed on the LCD monitor and  
the viewfinder. The video output signal is also the still  
image.  
6-7-1 Playing Back Voice Memos  
To stop the voice memo playback, press the STOP  
button.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
7
To return the pointer to the thumbnail display after  
playback of a voice memo, press the MENU BAR  
button to move the pointer to the menu bar, and then  
select EXIT.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
6
From the MENU BAR, select THUMBNAIL ꢀ VOICE  
MEMO CLIPS.  
<Note>  
The clip thumbnails with voice memos attached are  
displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The  
lower section of the LCD monitor shows information  
about the voice memo on the clip selected by the  
pointer.  
The voice memo playback signal is emitted through the  
speaker and the PHONES jack on the camera. This  
signal is not emitted from the AUDIO OUT jack.  
6-7-2 Recording a Voice Memo  
During thumbnail display, voice memos can be added to the  
clip on which the pointer is positioned.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
to which you want to attach a voice memo.  
Press the Voice Memo button and record the voice  
memo through the Voice Memo Microphone.  
“VOICE REC” is displayed at the top of the screen.  
<Notes>  
Shows the still image that  
the voice memo is related to.  
Thumbnail  
Display  
z When a voice memo is attached during thumbnail  
display, the voice memo is related to the first still  
image of the clip. Please refer to [3-8 Voice Memo  
Function] for more information.  
Shows the total number of voice  
memos attached to the clip.  
z When the power is abruptly turned off while a voice  
memo is being recorded during playback of a clip, the  
clip will not be affected by this, but the voice memo  
will not be recorded.  
4
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired  
voice memo to playback and press the SET button.  
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor.  
Voice Memo  
Microphone  
Voice Memo Button  
The pointer moves down.  
4
Press the Voice Memo button or the stop button again  
to stop recording.  
81  
         
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-7-3 Deleting Voice Memos  
6-9 Restoring Clips  
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden  
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card  
being accessed.  
1
2
Perform Steps 1 to 4 in the [6-7-1 Playing Back Voice  
Memos] section to select the voice memo in the clip.  
Move the pointer over the clip you want to delete, and  
press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
<Note>  
Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip markers can be  
restored. Delete the clips with red corrupt clip markers. If the  
clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.  
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip  
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability  
to restore the clips.  
3
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ DELETE.  
YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the cursor  
buttons and the SET button to select YES.  
The voice memo is deleted.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
6-8 Deleting Clips  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
you want to restore (defective clips are indicated by  
corrupt clip marks).  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip  
you want to delete.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button, and select OPERATION  
ꢀꢃREPAIR CLIP from the menu bar.  
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and the SET button to select YES.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button and select OPERATION  
ꢀ DELETE from the menu bar.  
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
6-10 Reconnection of Incomplete  
Clips  
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on  
multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied to  
different cards. Reconnection function generates one clip  
(the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor and SET button to select incomplete  
clips to reconnect.  
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with  
marker) are displayed in line.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button and select OPERATION  
ꢀ RE-CONNECTION from the menu bar.  
5
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-green  
frames) are deleted by this operation.  
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and SET button to select YES.  
<Note>  
Pressing the SET button stops the deletion operation in the  
middle.  
<Note>  
indication stays illuminated until all the incomplete clips  
that comprise the original clip are reconnected.  
82  
           
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-11 Copying Clips  
<Notes>  
z Do not turn the power off or remove or insert a card during  
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD memory  
card in the desired slot.  
copying. If you should accidentally perform one of the  
above operations, defective clips will be generated. Delete  
them, and then copy them again.  
z When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on  
the clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the  
SD memory card * , video and sound information is not  
copied, only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, Voice  
Memo, proxy, and real-time metadata.  
z When there is insufficient recording capacity on the  
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY” is  
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips to be  
copied include some with defects, the message “CANNOT  
ACCESS” is displayed, and copying will not proceed. If  
selected clips include any that are already recorded on the  
destination P2 card, copying will not proceed.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to the  
desired clip and press the SET button.  
Press the MENU BAR button and select OPERATION  
ꢀ COPY from the menu bar.  
Select Slot 1-5 or SD memory card as the destination.  
6
z To stop copying, press the SET button. Clips currently  
being copied to the destination will be deleted.  
z When identical clips exist on the destination card, the  
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.  
*1: Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions  
in using SD memory cards> (page 17).  
6-12 Setting of Clip Meta Data  
Information such as the name of person who shot the video,  
the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a text  
memo can be read from the SD memory card, and can be  
recorded as Clip Meta Data.  
4
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor  
buttons and SET button to select YES.  
Reading Clip Meta Data (metadata upload)  
1
2
Insert the SD memory card that contains the Clip Meta  
Data (metadata upload file).  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
<Note>  
When  
the  
thumbnail  
screen  
is  
displayed,  
simultaneously pressing the MODECHECK button and  
the MENU BAR button jumps to Step 5.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button. The cursor moves to the  
menu bar.  
Select OPERATION ꢀ DEVICE SETUP ꢀ META  
DATA ꢀ LOAD from the menu bar, and press the SET  
button.  
83  
     
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
3
MEMO* : Displays [OFFSET] (location of the frame where  
the text memo is added), [PERSON] (person who  
recorded the text memo added to the clip) and  
[TEXT] (contents of the text memo). The AJ-  
SPC700P can record one text memo per clip.  
5
Names of metadata upload files stored on the SD  
memory card are displayed. Select the desired files  
using the cursor buttons, and choose YES. Upload  
starts.  
Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is  
turned off. For [more information on] confirmation of  
uploaded data, see [6-17-4 Confirmation of Metadata  
Upload].  
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is  
selectable.  
*2 Be sure to enter PROGRAM NAME when entering  
SCENARIO. It is not possible to record only the  
SCENE NO or TAKE NO.  
Clip Meta Data items  
*3 Be sure to enter TEXT when entering MEMO. It is not  
possible to record only PERSON or OFFSET.  
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined  
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on the  
SD memory card. Other items are set automatically during  
shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 viewer,  
metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards  
using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2 viewer  
from the following URL and install it to your PC:  
<Note>  
The AJ-SPC700P only displays printable ASCII  
characters.  
To set whether or not the uploaded metadata is  
recorded  
http://panasonic.biz/sav/p2  
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see <Cautions in  
using SD memory cards> (page 17).  
Set ON/OFF by selecting META DATA ꢀ RECORD from the  
menu bar.  
<Note>  
The file which was edited by except P2 viewer is displayed  
as “UNKNOWN DATA”, and may not be read.  
GLOBAL CLIP ID:  
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the  
shooting status of the clip.  
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),  
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].  
AUDIO: [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of  
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]  
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).  
USER CLIP NAME:  
1
Displays the clip name specified by the user.*  
ACCESS: Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the  
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was  
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the  
latest update of the clip) and [LAST UPDATE  
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of  
the clip).  
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the device  
manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial number of  
the device) and [MODEL NAME] (model name of  
the device).  
SHOOT: Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who  
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of  
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),  
and  
[LOCATION]  
ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/  
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,  
longitude, latitude, and source of the information  
and name of the location).  
2
SCENARIO* :  
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and  
[TAKE NO.].  
NEWS: Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),  
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and  
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).  
84  
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method  
<Note>  
When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8 GB or more is  
used in this unit and a one-time continuous recording  
exceeds the prescribed duration (approx. 10 minutes for  
DVCPRO50 or approx. 20 minutes for DVCPRO or DV) or  
when a one-time recording extends over more than one P2  
card, the recording concerned will automatically be  
undertaken as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will be  
provided with its own COUNT value.  
Select META DATA ꢀ USER CLIP NAME from the menu  
bar to select the recording method. Two options are  
available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.  
z TYPE1  
USER CLIP NAME to be recorded  
If clip metadata has been  
Uploaded data  
read in  
If no clip metadata has been  
Example of recording (DVCPRO50) a clip on one P2 card  
read in or if the setting for  
recording clip metadata has  
been turned off  
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID  
(UMID data)  
REC start (recording start)  
REC/PAUSE (recording pause)  
Recording duration = Approx. 15 min.  
z TYPE2  
Clip 2  
COUNT value  
= 0002  
Clip 1  
COUNT value  
= 0001  
USER CLIP NAME to be recorded  
6
If clip metadata has been  
read in  
Uploaded data  
+ COUNT value*  
5 min.  
10 min.  
If no clip metadata has been  
read in or if the setting for  
recording clip metadata has  
been turned off  
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:  
Same as CLIP NAME  
REC start (recording start)  
REC/PAUSE (recording pause)  
* The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.  
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is  
captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2 has  
been selected as the recording method.  
The COUNT value can be reset using the following  
procedure.  
Select PROPERTY ꢀ DEVICE ꢀ META DATA from the  
menu bar, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the  
menu shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the  
cursor and press the SET button to reset the COUNT  
value to 1.  
Clip 1  
COUNT value  
= 0003  
Clip 2  
COUNT value  
= 0004  
2nd card  
1st card  
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the example  
above or their properties are indicated using a P2 device, the  
thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be displayed.  
Clear the uploaded metadata  
Select META DATA ꢀ INITIALIZE from the menu bar, and  
press the SET button. Select “YES” when the confirmation  
screen is displayed.  
6-13 Setting of Proxy (optional)  
By attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional)  
either to the optional slot or Slot 5, it is possible to specify  
the proxy recording setting.  
Select OPERATION ꢀ DEVICE SETUP ꢀ PROXY from  
the menu bar to specify the setting.  
For more information on settings, see the video encoder  
card instruction manual.  
85  
 
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-14 Formatting a P2 Card  
6-15 Formatting SD memory cards  
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail  
screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the camera-  
recorder, perform the following operation:  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ FORMAT.  
The following screen appears. Select the slot number  
for the P2 card you want to format.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
Select EXIT if formatting is not required.  
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ FORMAT.  
The following screen appears. Select “SD-CARD”.  
Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.  
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
5
The selected P2 card is formatted.  
5
The SD memory card is formatted.  
<Note>  
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the menu  
screen. For more information, see [4-10-2 Formatting,  
Writing and Reading an SD memory card].  
86  
     
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
THUMBNAIL INIT:  
Return the above thumbnail display settings to default.  
6-16 Setting the Thumbnail Display  
Mode  
Move the cursor to this option, and press the SET  
button. Select “YES” when the confirmation screen is  
displayed.  
EXIT:  
Returns to the previous menu.  
The thumbnail display mode can be customised to suit your  
preferences.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
From the menu bar, select THUMBNAILꢃꢀ SETUP.  
The following screen appears.  
6
MARKER IND. :  
Switches the shot mark marker between indication and no  
indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON (indication).  
VOICE MEMO IND. :  
Switches the voice memo marker between indication  
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON  
(indication).  
WIDE IND. :  
Switches the wide marker between indication and no  
indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON (indication).  
PROXY IND. :  
Switches the proxy indicator between indication and no  
indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON  
(indication).  
DATA DISPLAY:  
The time display field of the clip offers a choice of Time  
Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting Time (TIME) or  
Shooting Date (DATE)/Shooting Time and Date (DATE  
TIME). The factory setting is Time Code.  
DATE FORMAT:  
You can specify the display order for the shooting date  
as either Year/Month/Day (YMD), Month/Day/Year  
(MDY) or Day/Month/Year (DMY). The factory setting is  
Year/Month/Day. This setting is reflected in the  
recording date shown in the clip property and the  
shooting date shown when DATE is selected under the  
item DATA DISPLAY.  
THUMBNAIL SIZE:  
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one screen,  
either LARGE (3 C 2 thumbnails displayed) or  
NORMAL (4 C 3 thumbnails displayed) can be  
selected. The factory default value is NORMAL.  
87  
 
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-17-2 P2 Card Status Display  
6-17 Properties  
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are displayed.  
P2 Card Status Display Settings  
Select PROPERTY ꢀ CARD STATUS from the menu bar to  
set the desired indication mode (remaining free space or  
used memory capacity) for the P2 card status display.  
6-17-1 Clip Property  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY  
PROPERTY.  
ꢀ
CLIP  
The following screen appears.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ PROPERTY  
SETUP.  
The following screen appears. Select the P2 card  
status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP menu  
option.  
Clip Number  
Thumbnail  
Slip Information  
Displays the number of markers and voice memos  
attached to the clip.  
The  
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-  
protected P2 card.  
REMAIN:  
Slot Number  
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as the P2  
card status display.  
Clip Information  
USED:  
Displays detailed information about the clip.  
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2  
card status display.  
CLIP NAME:  
Display clip names.  
START TC:  
The time code value at the start of the  
recording.  
START UB:  
The user bit value at the start of the recording.  
DATE:  
The date of the recording.  
TIMEꢏ  
The time at the start of the recording.  
DURATION:  
The time length of the clip.  
CODEC: The recording format of the clip.  
Clip Meta Data  
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the  
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the SET  
button to check the detailed content. The underlined  
items are automatically set during shooting. For more  
information on displayed metadata, see [6-12 Setting of  
Clip Meta Data].  
88  
     
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
Contents of P2 Card Status Display Settings  
When “USED” is selected:  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ CARD STATUS.  
The following screen appears.  
When “REMAIN” is selected:  
6
Write-protect Mark  
The  
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.  
P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)  
Write-protect Mark  
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated  
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar graph  
indicator moves to the right as the used memory  
capacity increases.  
The following indications may appear, depending on the  
card status:  
The  
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.  
P2 Card Status (remaining free space)  
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is  
indicated by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph  
indicator moves to the left as the remaining free space  
decreases.  
FORMAT ERROR:  
The following indications may appear, depending on the  
card status:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.  
NO CARD:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
FORMAT ERROR:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.  
NO CARD:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
To check unique information, such as serial number or  
user ID, move the cursor to the desired P2 card and  
press the SET button.  
To check unique information, such as serial number or  
user ID, move the cursor to the desired P2 card and  
press the SET button.  
P2 Card memory capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and  
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are  
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity  
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.  
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card  
is displayed as 100%.  
P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total  
capacity in minutes. The total of the remaining memory  
capacity for each P2 card that is displayed may not  
match the actual total remaining memory capacity for  
the P2 cards because only the figure in minute is  
displayed.  
Total used memory capacity for all slots  
Displays the total used memory capacity for all 5 slots.  
Total remaining free space for the slot  
Displays the total remaining free space for all 5 slots.  
Please note that the remaining capacity of a write-  
protected P2 card is not included in the total remaining  
capacity.  
89  
Chapter 6 Manuipulating Clips with Thumbnails (continued)  
6-17-3 SD memory card Status Display  
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD memory  
card formatted condition, available memory capacity etc.  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ DEVICES ꢀ SD  
CARD.  
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message  
“SD STANDARD: SUPPORTED” is displayed.  
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the  
message “SD STANDARD: NOT SUPPORTED” is  
displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will not be  
successful. Format the card with the AJ-SPC700P.For more  
on formatting SD memory cards, see [6-15 Formatting SD  
memory cards].  
6-17-4 Confirmation of Metadata Upload  
The contents of the metadata upload file that is read from  
the SD memory card can be checked.  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ DEVICES ꢀ  
META DATA. The following screen appears:  
For more information on each item, see [6-12 Setting of Clip  
Meta Data].  
The META NAME is the meta data name written in the meta  
data upload file, and is not recorded in the clip.  
6-17-5 Video Encoder Card Status Display  
(optional)  
Attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional),  
select PROPERTY ꢀ DEVICES ꢀ PROXY from the menu  
bar.  
The number of the slot in which the video encoder card is  
inserted is displayed.  
90  
     
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections  
7-1-2 Inspecting the Camera Unit  
7-1 Inspections Before Shooting  
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally  
before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a color  
video monitor to check the image.  
1
2
3
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the  
zoom operation.  
Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide  
angle.  
7-1-1 Preparing for Inspections  
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the  
zoom operation.  
Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image  
changes to telephoto and wide angle.  
1
2
Mount a charged battery pack.  
Turn the power switch ON and check that 5 or more  
BATT indication marks appear.  
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the  
lens at objects with different degrees of brightness, to  
check that the automatic iris adjustment operates  
normally.  
z If fewer than 5 BATT indication marks appear, replace  
the battery with a fully-charged battery.  
1
4
5
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris  
ring, to check the manual iris adjustment.  
7
While holding down the instant iris automatic  
adjustment button, aim the lens at objects with different  
degrees of brightness, to check that the instant iris  
automatic adjustment operates properly.  
6
7
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and  
change the GAIN switch setting to L, M, and H, to check  
the following items:  
2
z The iris is adjusted for objects with the same  
brightness according to the switch setting.  
z The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen  
changes according to the switch setting.  
3
Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide  
cover.  
Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted  
card slot lights up in orange. If P2 cards are inserted  
into multiple card slots, only the P2 card access LED for  
the first-inserted P2 card lights up in orange. Then, the  
other P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2  
cards are inserted.  
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set the  
extender to the operating position to check that the  
extender operates properly.  
If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2  
card is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if there is no  
display, recording is not possible on that particular P2  
card.  
3
91  
         
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
2. Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic Adjustment  
7-1-3 Inspecting the Memory Recording  
Functions  
1
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to  
[AUTO].  
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from  
[1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [4. Inspecting the  
Earphone and Speaker].  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack at an  
appropriate sound source. Then, check that the level  
displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the  
sound level.  
1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording  
1
Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the  
remaining P2 card recording capacity is sufficient.  
Please refer to [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/  
capacity Indication] (page 50) for information about P2  
card remaining recording capacity.  
3. Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment  
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
2
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [TC].  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to  
[MAN].  
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button to check  
the following items:  
3
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that the level display increases when the  
controls are turned to the right.  
z The P2 access LED blinks in orange.  
z The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up.  
z System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder.  
4. Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker  
5
6
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button again.  
This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and  
showing orange, and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is  
turned off.  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker  
volume changes.  
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.  
Check that the speaker is turned off and the  
microphone sound can be heard from the earphone.  
Using the REC button on the handle, repeat Steps 4 to  
5 to check the same operation. Check the VTR button  
on the lens in the same way.  
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone  
volume changes.  
7
8
Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen  
brightness in the display window increases.  
Press the PLAY button to check that the clip that has  
just been shot is played back from the beginning.  
Check that recording and playback operate properly.  
5. Inspection for Using an External Microphone  
1
Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1  
and CH2 connectors.  
9
When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card  
slots, press the USER MAIN button to select the P2  
card used for recording.  
Repeat the operations in Steps 4 to 5 and 8 to check  
that recording and playback operate properly.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [REAR].  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switches on the rear  
panel to [MIC] or [+48V], depending on the power  
supply type of the external microphone.  
MIC: For a microphone with internal power supply.  
+48V: For a microphone with external power supply.  
4
Aim the microphone at a sound source. Then check  
that the audio level meter in the display window and the  
audio level display inside the viewfinder change  
according to the sound level.  
The channels can also be checked separately by  
connecting a single microphone to each channel.  
92  
     
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
6. Inspection of the clock, time code, and user bits  
7-2 Maintenance  
1
Set the user’s bit as required.  
Please refer to [4-5-1 Setting the User Bits] for the  
setting procedures.  
7-2-1 Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder  
z Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt from  
the viewfinder.  
2
Set the time code.  
Please refer to [4-5-3 Setting the Time Code] for the  
setting procedures.  
z Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner.  
z Do not wipe the mirror. If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the  
mirror, remove it with a commercially available air blower.  
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
7-2-2 Phenomenon Inherent to CCD  
Cameras  
Press the REC START/STOP button.  
Check that the counter display number changes as  
recording progresses.  
Smears  
Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high  
brightness.  
This phenomenon may appear more frequently as the  
electronic shutter speed increases.  
5
6
7
Press the REC START/STOP button again.  
Check that recording stops and the counter display  
number stops changing.  
7
Set the TCG switch to [F-RUN].  
Check that the counter display number changes  
regardless of recording status.  
7-2-3 Replacing the Backup Battery  
The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup  
battery already mounted.  
When the battery runs out, the [BACK UP BATT EMPTY]  
display appears on the viewfinder screen for 5 seconds after  
the power switch is turned ON.  
The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out.  
Also, the TCG time code value returns to [00:00:00:00], and  
the time code backup is disabled. The battery must be  
replaced.  
Please consult your distributor for replacement with a new  
battery (CR2032).  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [UB].  
Each time the HOLD button is pressed, make sure that  
the displayed value changes in the following sequence:  
VTCG ꢀ DATE ꢀ TIME ꢀ No display (time zone) ꢀ  
TCG; and also verify that the displayed value is correct.  
If DATE, TIME, or time zone is not correct, refer to [4-5-  
2 Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time] for  
guidance on setting the correct values.  
<Note>  
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and  
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback  
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.  
The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD  
monitor side is removed (right side when viewed from the  
front).  
<Note>  
Please contact the store where you purchased the camera  
when replacing the battery.  
93  
       
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
7-2-4 Connector Signals  
ECU  
CAM CONT  
CAM DATA  
NC  
DC IN  
AUDIO IN  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
GND  
NC  
1
2
3
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
NC  
ECU ON  
UNREG 12V  
GND  
+12V  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AB103A0007  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AA104H0038  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RX-4P(SW1)  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AY106J0001  
PUSH  
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-6SC  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
4
1
2
1
2
3
6
4
1
3
3
5
2
<Note>  
Confirm correct polarity when using an  
external power supply.  
DC OUT  
GND  
AUDIO OUT  
GND  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
FRONT MIC IN  
NC  
AUDIO OUT (H)  
AUDIO OUT (C)  
1
2
3
GND  
NC  
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
+12V  
Panasonic Part No.  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RD-3P  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
K1AA103H0016  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AY104J0001  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AB103B0013  
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-4SC  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
Manufacturer Part No. NC3FBH2  
(Eye-Trek)  
PUSH  
1
2
1
4
3
3
2
2
1
3
94  
 
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
7-3 Warning System  
7-3-1 Warning Description Tables  
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the WARNING  
lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.  
<Note>  
The WARNING lamp has the highest priority, followed by the tally lamp, and then the warning tone. When multiple errors occur  
simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered. The [WIRELESS RF], however, may not be indicated, depending  
on the menu setting.  
1. System Errors  
3. Battery Empty  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining  
capacity start blinking.  
The error code lights up.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Lights up.  
Blinks once per second.  
The BATT LED lights up.  
Beeps continuously.  
7
The SYSTEM ERROR indication and the  
error code light up.  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
Warning tone  
Beeps continuously.  
Warning  
description  
The battery has run out.  
The operation stops.  
Warning  
description  
An error in the reference signal or the  
communication.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
The operation stops.  
Countermeasures Replace the battery.  
Please confirm [7-3-2 Error Codes] and  
consult your distributor.  
Countermeasures  
4. Write-protect  
2. Card removal error  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA  
capacity start blinking.  
Display window  
indication  
Error code E-30 appears.  
Continues to light up until an operation is  
performed.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
The “TURN POWER OFF” indicator blinks.  
Continues to beep.  
WARNING lamp  
Continues to blink 4 times per second until  
an operation is performed.  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The WP indicator blinks.  
Warning tone  
Continues to beep until an operation is  
performed.  
The P2 card being accessed has been  
removed, resulting in an error in the internal  
memory of the camera-recorder.  
Warning  
description  
Warning  
description  
The inserted P2 cards are write-protected.  
Recording is disabled.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Cannot be performed.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Turn off the power to the camera-recorder. If  
Disable the write-protect or replace the P2  
card.  
Countermeasures there is an error in a clip on the removed P2  
Countermeasures  
card, repair the clip.  
95  
     
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
5. P2 Card Fully Recorded  
7. Low Wireless Signal Reception  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA  
capacity start blinking.  
Display window  
indication  
No display.  
Continues to light up until an operation is  
performed.  
Blinks 4 times per second. (During pause  
and recording)  
WARNING lamp  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Continues to blink 4 times per second until  
an operation is performed.  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Tally lamp  
The WIRELESS RF indicator lights up while  
recording continues.  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The END indicator blinks.  
Viewfinder  
Continues to beep until an operation is  
performed.  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning  
description  
The P2 cards are recorded to maximum  
capacity.  
Warning  
description  
This error indicates poor wireless audio  
reception conditions.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
The recording stops.  
Recording/  
Continues to operate without receiving the  
playbackoperation wireless microphone signal.  
Check the microphone power supply and the  
reception status of the wireless receiver.  
Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a  
new P2 card.  
Countermeasures  
Countermeasures  
6. Recording Error  
8. 1394 (when AJ-YAD800G is attached)  
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code  
The 1394 E-__ꢄ indicator in the display  
window lights up.  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
indication  
display field. Even after recording is stopped,  
this display continues to blink until the next  
operation is performed.  
Blinks times per second while the  
4
WARNING lamp  
WARNING lamp  
WARNING lamp recording is continuing.  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second while the TALLY  
LAMP recording is continuing.  
Blinks 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
Tally lamp  
In the case of Error Code 92, “1394 INITIAL  
ERROR” indicator lights up (during pause  
and recording)  
For Error Codes other than Error Code 92, or  
if REC SIGNAL is set to “1394”, no error is  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
The REC WARNING indicator lights up.  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
Viewfinder  
Beeps 4 times per second while recording  
continues.  
This indicates a failure either in the P2 card  
recording or the recording circuit.  
Warning  
description  
Beeps 4 times per second while ALARM  
recording is continuing.  
Warning tone  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
This indicates a failure of the DVCPRO/DV  
connector.  
Warning  
description  
Recording stops.  
Restart recording. Or, turn the power OFF  
Countermeasures and turn it ON again, before starting  
The operation continues, but input signals to  
the DVCPRO/DV connector are abnormal.  
Recording/  
playback operation  
recording.  
Check the connection between the  
IEEE1394 cable and the DVCPRO/DV  
connector, settings of any external device  
and menus, and the turn on the power again.  
If the warning indication is still illuminated,  
confirm the “Error Codes” in the IEEE1394  
interface board instruction manual, and  
consult your distributor.  
Countermeasures  
96  
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections (continued)  
7-3-2 Error Codes  
9. Battery Nearly Empty  
The following error codes are displayed in the display  
window if an error occurs in the camera:  
Display window  
indication  
One of the bars in the battery remaining  
indicator starts blinking.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks once per second.  
Blinks once per second.  
The BATT LED blinks.  
Beeps 4 times per second.  
Code No.  
Description  
Video initialisation error  
E-11  
E-27  
E-30  
E-38  
E-3F  
E-6F  
Viewfinder  
Recording control error  
P2 card removal error  
Warning tone  
P2 streaming microcontroller error  
Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit.  
Reference signal error.  
Warning  
description  
The battery is about to run out.  
Continues to operate.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Countermeasures Replace the battery as required.  
10. P2 Card Nearly Full  
7
Display window  
indication  
One of the bars for remaining MEDIA  
capacity starts blinking.  
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
The P2 card remaining capacity indicator  
blinks.  
Viewfinder  
Beeps once per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning tone  
Warning  
description  
The total remaining capacity of all the P2  
cards is two minutes or less.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Continues to operate.  
Replace the cards. If there is an empty card  
slot, insert a new card.  
Countermeasures  
11. P2 Card Error  
If the error occurs during recording,  
“00:0000:11” appears as the time code  
indication. The indication continues to flash  
after recording is stopped and until the next  
operation is performed. There is no  
indication if the error occurs during playback.  
Display window  
indication  
If the error occurs during recording, the lamp  
flashes four times per second for a period of  
about three seconds. The lamp does not  
light if the error occurs during playback.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
If the error occurs during recording, the lamp  
flashes four times per second for a period of  
about three seconds. The lamp does not  
light if the error occurs during playback.  
A flashing “CARD ERR _” appears. In the  
actual indication the _ is replaced by the slot  
number of the P2 card that triggered the  
error.  
Viewfinder  
If the error occurs during recording, the tone  
sounds four times per second for a period of  
about three seconds. The tone does not  
sound if the error occurs during playback.  
Warning tone  
Warning  
description  
An error has occurred while recording data  
to or playing data from a P2 card.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Stop recording or playback.  
Countermeasures Replace the affected P2 card.  
97  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables  
8-1 Menu Configuration  
MENU  
USER MENU  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
SYSTEM MODE  
OPTION MODE  
REC FUNCTION  
OUTPUT SEL  
LCD MONITOR  
GENLOCK  
MAIN MENU  
ROP  
MATRIX  
OPTION MENU  
COLOR CORRECTION  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
OPTION  
FLARE  
CAMERA SETTING  
VF  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
USER BOX  
CAM OPERATION  
CAMERA ID  
SHUTTER SPEED  
SHUTTER SELECT  
USER SW  
VF INDICATOR1  
VF INDICATOR2  
MODE CHECK IND  
! LED  
SW MODE  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
USER SW GAIN  
IRIS  
Opening the Menus  
USER MENU:  
BATTERY/P2CARD  
BATTERY SETTING1  
BATTERY SETTING2  
MIC/AUDIO 1  
MAIN OPERATION  
FILE  
Displayed when the MENU  
button is pressed.  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
SD CARD R/W SELECT  
LENS FILE  
MIC/AUDIO 2  
MAIN MENU:  
TC/UB  
UMID SET/INFO  
SCENE  
Displayed when the MENU  
button is pressed for at least 3  
seconds.  
INITIALIZE  
MAINTENANCE  
SYSTEM CHECK  
LENS ADJ  
BLACK SHADING  
WHITE SHADING  
DIAGNOSTIC1  
DIAGNOSTIC2  
HOURS METER  
USER MENU SELECT  
SYSTEM SETTING(USER)  
PAINT(USER)  
VF(USER)  
OPTION MENU:  
Displayed when the MENU  
button is pressed while pressing  
the LIGHT button.  
CAM OPE(USER)  
MAIN OPE(USER)  
FILE(USER)  
MAINTENANCE(USER)  
<Notes>  
z The following items can be set: 42 camera-related items (14 C 3 pages), 14 recording-related items (1 page).  
z The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by <USER MENU SELECT>.  
z The underlined items can only be selected as one whole page (with all sub-items). Individual sub-items cannot be selected  
separately.  
About Menu Description Tables  
The following letters indicate whether the modified menu  
data is saved to or read out from the memory.  
The – indicates that the data cannot be saved or read.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
REC SIGNAL  
CAM  
Select video input signals.  
S = Can be saved and read as scene data file.  
C = Can be saved or read using CARD READ/WRITED.  
U = Can be saved and read as user data.  
Please refer to [8-7-4 SCENE] and [8-7-5 INITIALIZE].  
F = Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA.  
Please refer to [8-7-5 INITIALIZE].  
E = Can be saved using ECU DATA SAVE.  
Please refer to [5-9 Connecting the AJ-EC3P Extension  
Controller].  
CAM  
ꢏ
Record the signal from the  
camera  
VIDEO  
1394  
VIDEO: Record the signal from the  
GENLOCK IN terminal  
1394: Record the signal from the 1394  
input terminal. (when optional  
AJ-YAD800G is attached.)  
– C U F E  
About the settings available for this  
item.  
This section shows the  
adjustable range of the  
set value, and available  
options for this item.  
98  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-2 SYSTEM SETTING  
8-2-1 SYSTEM MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
USB  
ON  
OFF  
Select the USB drive mode when using  
the P2 card as bulk storage by  
connecting the AJ-SPC700P with a PC  
via USB2.0.  
REC SIGNAL  
CAM  
VIDEO  
1394  
Select video input signals.  
CAM  
ꢏ
Record the signal from the  
camera  
VIDEO: Record the signal from the  
ON: Switches to the USB drive  
mode. Recording, playback or  
thumbnail operation via the AJ-  
SPC700P is not permitted.  
OFF: Stops the USB drive mode, and  
returns to normal operation.  
<Note>  
After the power is turned off, this setting  
defaults to “OFF” when the power is  
next turned on.  
GENLOCK IN terminal  
1394: Record the signal from the 1394  
input terminal (when optional  
AJ-YAD800G is attached)  
<Notes>  
z After the power has been turned  
OFF, this setting defaults to CAM  
when the power is turned ON again.  
z With VIDEO selected, to synchronise  
this camera-recorder to the video  
signal (VBS) that is input to the  
– – U F –  
GENLOCK  
IN  
terminal,  
the  
GENLOCK item in [8-2-6 GENLOCK]  
must be set to EXT.  
– C U F E  
8-2-2 OPTION MODE  
ASPECT  
16:9  
4:3  
Select the aspect ratio for recording.  
16:9: Record in <16:9> aspect ratio.  
4:3: Record in <4:3> aspect ratio.  
8
– C U F E  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
REC MODE  
50M  
25M  
DV  
Select the recording mode.  
50M: Record in DVCPRO50 format.  
25M: Record in DVCPRO format.  
SAVE SW (AUD ON  
Select whether or not to forcibly disable  
the audio output when the SAVE ON/  
OFF switch is set to [ON].  
OUT)  
OFF  
DV:  
Record in DV format.  
– C U F E  
ON: Disable audio output.  
OFF: Enable audio output.  
SET UP  
0%  
7.5%A  
Switch the setup.  
0%: Setup is switched to 0% for both  
the camera output and the  
recording.  
7.5%A: Setup is switched to 7.5% for  
the camera output and 0% for  
the recording.  
– C U F –  
SAVE SW (LCD) ON  
Select whether or not to automatically  
turn off the LCD monitor when the  
SAVE ON/OFF switch is set to [ON].  
ON: Turn off LCD monitor.  
OFF  
– C U F E  
OFF: Do not turn off LCD monitor.  
– C U F –  
REC TALLY  
RED  
GREEN  
CHAR  
Selects display of the recording status  
of the camera when the AJ-SPC700P is  
controlling an external VTR, by setting  
the menu option 1394 CONTROL to  
“BOTH”.  
The menu option 1394 CONTROL is  
found in the OPTION MODE screen on  
the SYSTEM setting page.  
RED: The red tally lamp lights up.  
GREEN:The green tally lamp lights up.  
CHAR: The VF displays [REC] in  
characters.  
<Note>  
Menu options for setting 1394 are displayed when an  
IEEE1394 interface board (AJ-YAD800G, optional) is  
attached. For more information, see the AJ-YAD800G  
instruction manual. Note that the AJ-SPC700P incorporates  
the following additional items:  
Items/  
Data Saved e Range  
Adjustabl  
Remarks  
<Note>  
1394 control menu options are only  
displayed when an IEEE1394 interface  
board (AJ-YAD800G, optional  
accessory) is attached. For more  
information, see the AJ-YAD800G  
instruction manual.  
1394  
CONTROL  
OFF  
BOTH  
Select the control method for recording  
when an external device for backup  
recording is connected via the DVCPRO/  
DV connector:  
OFF: The external device is not  
controlled.  
– C U F E  
BOTH:Recording is performed by both  
the AJ-SPC700P and the external  
device.  
ACCESS LED ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable  
illumination of the P2 card access  
LEDs.  
ON: Enable the P2 card access  
LEDs to light up for card status  
indications.  
– C U F –  
1394 CMD SEL REC_P  
STOP  
Determine the recording operation of the  
external backup device when the REC  
START/STOP button is pressed:  
REC_P: Record/Pause  
OFF: LEDs remain off.  
– C U F E  
STOP: Record/Stop  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
99  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-2-3 REC FUNCTION  
8-2-4 OUTPUT SEL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
PRE REC  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable PRE  
RECORDING.  
ON: PRE RECORDING enabled.  
OFF: PRE RECORDING disabled.  
<Note>  
VIDEO OUT  
SEL  
VBS  
VF  
Y
Select the output signal on the VIDEO  
OUT connecter.  
VBS:Output a regular composite  
signal.  
VF: Output a VF Y signal. The status  
display is also superimposed.  
Specify the PRE RECORDING time by  
using the menu option PRE REC TIME.  
Y:  
Output a component Y signal.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
PRE REC TIME 1SEC  
Set PRE RECORDING.  
1-15SEC:  
OUTPUT CHAR MENU  
ONLY  
Set the character contents  
superimposed onto the output signals  
for the VIDEO OUT connecter.  
MENU ONLY:  
Displays only when the menu  
characters are superimposed. No  
display appears when other  
characters are superimposed.  
TC:Display the time code. (Displays the  
menu when menu characters are  
superimposed.)  
:
8SEC  
:
15SEC  
Set the length of time that can be  
retrospectively recorded before the  
REC START button is pressed.  
<Note>  
The maximum selectable range is 8  
seconds when the REC MODE in the  
<SYSTEM MODE> screen is set to  
50M (DVCPRO50).  
Select whether or not to enable LOOP  
REC.  
This setting can be used with PRE  
RECORDING features.  
ON: Enable LOOP REC.  
OFF:Disable LOOP REC.  
<Note>  
After the power is turned off, this item  
will default to OFF the next time the  
power is turned on.  
Set the available memory space for  
voice memos in P2 cards.  
ON: Reserve a voice memo area of 10  
minutes or longer separately from  
the video recording capacity. The  
voice memo area can be used  
even when FULL is displayed for  
the recording capacity of the P2  
card.  
TC  
STATUS  
– C U F –  
LOOP REC  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
<Note>  
The TC display position moves up and  
down depending on the camera ID  
position.  
STATUS:  
Display the same characters  
superimposed on the VF signal.  
(Displays the menu when menu  
characters are superimposed.)  
– – – F –  
– C U F –  
VOICE MEMO ON  
LCD MON  
CHAR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to superimpose  
characters on the LCD monitor. (The  
character content is the same as the  
video output signal.)  
RESERV  
OFF  
ON: Enable superimpose.  
(Not interlocked with the VIDEO  
OUT CHARACTER switch.)  
OFF:Disable superimpose.  
(Not interlocked with the VIDEO  
OUT CHARACTER switch.)  
OFF:Do not reserve any voice memo  
space.  
<Note>  
Even when this item is set to OFF, and  
FULL is displayed for the P2 card’s  
recording capacity, it may be possible to  
record voice memos depending on the  
status of the P2 card.  
– C U F –  
VF MODE  
EE/PB  
EE  
Select the image to display in the  
viewfinder.  
EE/PB: Display the playback image in  
the playback mode.  
Always display the camera  
image.  
EE:  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
REC START  
ALL  
Select operating modes that allow  
recording to start.  
ALL: Allow recording to start during  
stop, recording pause, and  
playback.  
THUMBNAIL  
OUT  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to output clip  
thumbnails displayed on the LCD  
monitor to the video output signals.  
ON: Enable output.  
NORMAL  
OFF:Disable output.  
NORMAL:  
– C U F –  
Allow recording to start during  
stop and recording pause.  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
P.ON REC  
SLOT SEL  
HOLD  
SLOT1  
Select the recording order of the slot  
when the power is turned on.  
HOLD:  
The recording order starts with the  
card previously selected when the  
power was turned off.  
SLOT1:  
The recording order starts with the  
card that is inserted in Slot 1 when  
the power is turned on.  
– C U F –  
100  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-2-5 LCD MONITOR  
8-2-6 GENLOCK  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
BRIGHTNESS –7  
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness.  
GENLOCK  
INT  
EXT  
Switch the camera synchronising  
signal.  
INT: Synchronise with the internal  
reference signal regardless of the  
reference signal input to the  
GENLOCK IN terminal.  
EXT: Synchronise with the reference  
signal input to the GENLOCK IN  
terminal.  
Perform coarse phase adjustment for  
horizontal hold when configuring a  
system.  
:
+0  
:
– C U F – +7  
COLOR LEVEL –7  
Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level.  
Adjust the LCD monitor contrast.  
:
+0  
:
– C U F E  
– C U F – +7  
H PHASE  
COARSE  
–50  
:
+00  
:
CONTRAST  
–7  
:
+0  
:
– – – – – +50  
– C U F – +7  
H PHASE FINE –160  
Perform fine phase adjustment for  
horizontal hold when configuring a  
system.  
BACKLIGHT  
NORMAL  
HIGH  
Select whether or not to set the LCD  
monitor brightness to always high.  
:
+000  
:
+160  
NORMAL  
:
The brightness changes  
according to the  
<Note>  
This adjustment simultaneously shifts  
the SC phase.  
BRIGHTNESS setting.  
Set to always high.  
HIGH:  
– – – – –  
8
– C U F –  
SC PHASE  
COARSE  
0
1
:
Perform coarse SC PHASE adjustment  
when GENLOCK is set.  
SELF SHOOT NORMAL  
MIRROR  
Select whether or not to change the  
LCD monitor to mirror image.  
NORMAL  
:
Do not change to mirror  
image.  
3
– – – – –  
MIRROR  
:
Change to mirror image.  
SC PHASE  
FINE  
–75  
:
+00  
:
Perform fine SC PHASE adjustment  
when GENLOCK is set.  
<Note>  
When adjusting GENLOCK, please  
adjust H PHASE first, and then adjust  
SC PHASE.  
– C U F –  
ASPECT CONV. SQUEEZE  
LT.BOX  
Select a screen ratio for images  
displayed on the LCD monitor.  
SQEEZE: Display images in the squeeze  
size.  
+75  
LT.BOX  
:
Display images in the letter  
box size.  
– – – – –  
<Note>  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
This item is enabled only when  
ASPECT described in “8-2-1 SYSTEM  
MODE” is set to16:9.  
– C U F –  
101  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-3 PAINT  
8-3-1 ROP  
8-3-2 MATRIX  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
MASTER PED –200  
Set the master pedestal level.  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
A
B
Select the color correction table. 2  
types of tables can be stored: type A  
and type B.  
:
+005  
:
S C U F E  
S C U F E +200  
MATRIX R-G  
–31  
:
+06  
:
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
MASTER DTL –31  
Set the H Detail and V Detail levels.  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
:
+00  
S C U F E  
+31  
:
S C U F E  
+31  
MATRIX R-B  
–31  
:
+12  
:
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E 0.75  
MATRIX G-R  
–31  
:
+06  
:
KNEE POINT  
70.0%  
:
Set the KNEE POINT position in 0.5%  
steps.  
85 0%  
:
S C U F E 107.0%  
S C U F E  
+31  
MATRIX G-B  
–31  
:
–01  
:
KNEE SLOPE  
0
:
Set the KNEE slope.  
Set the Rch gain.  
50  
S C U F E  
+31  
:
S C U F E  
99  
MATRIX B-R  
–31  
:
+07  
:
R GAIN  
–200  
:
+000  
:
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +200  
MATRIX B-G  
–31  
:
–05  
:
G GAIN  
–200  
:
Set the Gch gain.  
+000  
:
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +200  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
Select the color correction table to be  
applied to the selected GAIN switch (L/  
M/H).  
B GAIN  
–200  
:
Set the Bch gain.  
S C U F E  
+000  
:
S C U F E +200  
<Note>  
R PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
Set the Rch pedestal level.  
Set the Gch pedestal level.  
Set the Bch pedestal level.  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
+000  
:
S C U F E +100  
G PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
+000  
:
S C U F E +100  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
B PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
+000  
:
S C U F E +100  
102  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-3-3 COLOR CORRECTION  
8-3-4 LOW SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
R
–63  
Perform red color correction (saturation  
and hue).  
„
GAIN  
MASTER  
–3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
:
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
+00  
:
0dB  
:
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E 30dB  
R-Mg  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform color correction (saturation and  
hue) between red and magenta.  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
17  
:
Set H.DTL LEVEL.  
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E 63  
Mg  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform magenta color correction  
(saturation and hue).  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
18  
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E 31  
Mg-B  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform color correction (saturation and  
hue) between magenta and blue.  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
02  
:
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E 15  
B
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform blue color correction  
(saturation and hue).  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which  
H.DTL is added. The greater the value,  
the higher the frequency (the narrower  
the DTL).  
8
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
+63  
31  
LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
0
1
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
B-Cy  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform color correction (saturation and  
hue) between blue and cyan.  
:
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is  
set to STD1, each setting value  
represents brightness levels, as follows:  
0 = about 0%, 1 = about 4%,  
+00  
:
5
S C U F E +63  
Cy  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform cyan color correction  
(saturation and hue).  
(SAT/PHASE)  
2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E  
Cy-G  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform color correction (saturation and  
hue) between cyan and green.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
0.45  
:
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E 0.75  
G
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform green color correction  
(saturation, hue).  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
:
OFF  
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E +63  
S C U F E +3  
G-Yl  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform color correction (saturation,  
hue) between green and yellow.  
„MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
Select the color correction table.  
TABLE  
S C U F E  
S C U F E +63  
„COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
Set the color correction to ON or OFF.  
Yl  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform yellow color correction  
(saturation, hue).  
CORRECT  
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E  
S C U F E +63  
<Note>  
Yl-R  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform color correction (saturation,  
hue) between yellow and red.  
:
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
„COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable color  
correction for the selected GAIN switch  
(L/M/H).  
CORRECT  
ON: Enable correction.  
OFF:Disable correction.  
S C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
103  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-3-5 MID SETTING  
8-3-6 HIGH SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
„
GAIN  
MASTER  
–3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
„
GAIN  
MASTER  
–3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6,  
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
:
:
9dB  
:
18dB  
:
S C U F E 30dB  
S C U F E 30dB  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
14  
:
Set H.DTL LEVEL.  
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
12  
:
Set H.DTL.  
S C U F E 63  
S C U F E 63  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
15  
:
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
14  
:
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
S C U F E 31  
S C U F E 31  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
DTL CORING  
00  
:
03  
:
05  
:
S C U F E 15  
S C U F E 15  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which  
H.DTL is added. The greater the value,  
the higher the frequency (the narrower  
the DTL).  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which  
H.DTL is added. The greater the value,  
the higher the frequency (the narrower  
the DTL).  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
31  
31  
LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
0
1
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
0
:
3
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is  
set to STD1, each setting value  
represents brightness levels, as follows:  
0 = about 0%, 1 = about 4%,  
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is  
set to STD1, each setting value  
represents brightness levels, as follows:  
0 = about 0%, 1 = about 4%,  
5
5
2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
:
:
0.45  
:
0.55  
:
S C U F E 0.75  
S C U F E 0.75  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
:
:
OFF  
:
OFF  
:
S C U F E +3  
S C U F E +3  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
Select the color correction table.  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
Select the color correction table.  
B
B
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
„COLOR  
ON  
Set the color correction to ON or OFF.  
„
COLOR  
ON  
Set the color correction to ON or OFF.  
CORRECT  
OFF  
CORRECT  
OFF  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
104  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-3-7 ADDITIONAL DTL  
8-3-8 SKIN TONE DTL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
KNEE APE LVL OFF  
1
Set KNEE APE LEVEL.  
„
DTL  
SKIN TONE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the skin tone DTL to ON or OFF.  
2
S C U F E  
:
S C U F E  
„SKIN TONE  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for ZEBRA within  
the SKIN TONE range.  
5
ZEBRA  
CHROMA DTL OFF  
Set the chroma detail.  
Detects the chroma edge and  
superimposes it on Y to enhance  
H.DTL. A greater value increases the  
correction.  
Adjust the detail level toward +  
(upwards).  
1
S C U F E  
:
5
SKIN DTL  
CORING  
0
:
5
:
Adjust the effect of SKIN TONE DTL  
CORING.  
S C U F E  
DTL GAIN(+)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E  
7
SKIN TONE  
GET  
Used when obtaining the target hue for  
SKIN TONE DTL. Align the center  
marker and the target object with each  
other.  
Set the maximum value of the  
brightness signal to which SKIN TONE  
effect is enabled.  
S C U F E  
+31  
DTL GAIN(–)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
Adjust the detail level toward the –  
(downwards).  
– – – – –  
Y MAX  
000  
:
190  
:
S C U F E  
+31  
DTL CLIP  
00  
:
63  
Adjust the detail signal clip towards the  
+ direction.  
8
S C U F E  
255  
Y MIN  
000  
:
010  
:
Set the minimum value of the  
brightness signal to which the SKIN  
TONE effect is enabled.  
S C U F E  
DTL SOURCE (R+G)/2  
(G+B)/2  
Set the signal source for detail signal  
components.  
S C U F E  
255  
2G+R+B /4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
G
I CENTER  
000  
:
022  
:
Set the center position on the I axis (the  
area where SKIN TONE is enabled).  
S C U F E  
S C U F E 255  
H.DTL LINE MIX 0H  
1H  
Set the scan line to generate the H.DTL  
signal.  
I WIDTH  
000  
:
010  
:
Set the area width where SKIN TONE  
is enabled along the I axis above and  
below the I CENTER.  
2H  
S C U F E  
„
CORNER DTL ON  
ON/OFF switching for CORNER DTL  
mode, which enhances the resolution  
around the screen perimeter.  
S C U F E 255  
OFF  
Q WIDTH  
000  
:
005  
:
Set the area width where SKIN TONE  
is enabled along the Q axis above and  
below the I CENTER.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E 255  
Q PHASE  
–128  
Set the phase in the area where SKIN  
TONE is enabled based on the Q axis.  
:
+000  
:
S C U F E +127  
Y
R-Y  
Q-WIDTH  
I-WIDTH  
Y-MAX  
+ direction  
I-CENTER  
Q-PHASE  
– direction  
B-Y  
Y-MIN  
= SKIN TONE AREA  
0
<Note>  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
105  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-3-9 KNEE/LEVEL  
8-3-10 GAMMA  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
MASTER PED –200  
Set the master pedestal.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set the master gamma in 0.01% steps.  
:
:
+005  
:
0.45  
:
S C U F E +200  
S C U F E 0.75  
„
KNEE  
MANUAL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE  
switch is OFF. The KNEE POINT/  
SLOPE set value is enabled when this  
setting is ON.  
Set the KNEE POINT position in 0.5%  
steps.  
R GAMMA  
–15  
Set the Rch gamma.  
Set the Bch gamma.  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E  
KNEE POINT  
S C U F E +15  
70.0%  
:
85.0%  
:
B GAMMA  
–15  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E 107.0%  
S C U F E +15  
KNEE SLOPE 00  
Set the KNEE SLOPE.  
0 setting is equal to KNEE OFF.  
<Note>  
The adjustable range when using the  
AJ-EC3P is from 00 to 98.  
GAMMA MODE STD1  
SEL  
Select the gamma.  
:
STD1: Standard gamma feature.  
STD2: Gamma feature that conforms to  
the ITU-R.BT709 standards.  
NEWS: This video gamma feature can  
effectively reproduce gradations  
by reducing whiteouts and  
blackouts when shooting an  
object with partially highlighted  
areas. This gamma is especially  
effective in the AUTO KNEE  
mode.  
50  
:
99 (98)  
STD2  
NEWS  
S C U F E  
„WHITE CLIP ON  
Set the WHITE CLIP feature to ON or  
OFF. The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is  
enabled when this setting is ON.  
OFF  
S C U F E  
WHITE CLIP  
LVL  
90%  
:
105%  
:
Set WHITE CLIP LEVEL.  
<Note>  
S C U F E 109%  
Selecting NEWS gamma disables  
settings under the items KNEE SLOPE,  
KNEE POINT, and A.KNEE POINT  
outlined in [8-3-9 KNEE/LEVEL]. These  
settings are also disabled when NEWS  
gamma is selected with the USER  
switch.  
A.KNEE POINT 80%  
Set the AUTO KNEE POINT position in  
0.5% steps. This setting is enabled  
when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE  
selector switch is set to CAM.AUTO  
KNEE ON.  
:
85%  
:
107%  
S C U F E  
A.KNEE LVL  
100  
:
Set the AUTO KNEE LEVEL.  
S C U F E  
105  
:
S C U F E 109  
A.KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
:
4
Set the AUTO KNEE response speed.  
The smaller the setting value, the faster  
the response speed.  
8-3-11 FLARE  
S C U F E  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
<Note>  
R FLARE  
000  
Set the R FLARE.  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen. The items without „ are the setting items for PAINT  
MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
:
100  
S C U F E  
G FLARE  
000  
:
100  
Set the G FLARE.  
Set the B FLARE.  
S C U F E  
B FLARE  
000  
:
100  
S C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
106  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-4 VF  
8-3-12 „CAMERA SETTING  
8-4-1 VF DISPLAY  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the DTL (H, V) to ON or OFF.  
DISP  
CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
NORMAL: Display status constantly.  
HOLD: Display status only when the  
MODE CHECK switch is  
pressed.  
S C U F E  
– C U F E  
2D LPF  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the two-  
dimensional LPF that reduces cross-  
color.  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
Set the DISP MODE.  
Switch the camera’s Warning/Message  
indication. Please refer to [4-7-4  
Display Modes and Setting Changes/  
adjustment Result Messages] for more  
information.  
S C U F E  
HIGH COLOR ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the HIGH  
COLOR mode, which enhances the  
color dynamic range.  
S C U F E  
– C U F E  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
Set the gamma circuit to ON or OFF.  
Switch the test signal ON or OFF.  
Set the flare correction to ON or OFF.  
VF OUT  
Y
NAM  
R
G
B
Select the VF output.  
Y:  
Brightness signal  
S C U F E  
NAM: Output signal with the highest  
level among R, G, and B  
signals.  
TEST SAW  
ON  
OFF  
R:  
G:  
B:  
Rch signal  
Gch signal  
Bch signal  
S C U F E  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
– C U F E  
8
VF DTL  
0
:
3
:
Select the VF DTL.  
S C U F E  
Additionally enhance the DTL for the  
VF signal. 0 setting is the same DTL as  
the primary scan lines.  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the H-F COMPE  
mode, which enhances the DTL in the  
high-frequency range.  
– C U F E  
5
S C U F E  
ZEBRA1  
DETECT  
0%  
:
70%  
:
Set the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE  
value).  
– C U F E 109%  
ZEBRA Pattern Display  
ZEBRA2  
DETECT  
0%  
Set the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE  
value).  
:
85%  
:
ZEBRA 2  
Video Level  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
– C U F E 109%  
109%  
ZEBRA2  
OFF  
SPOT  
ON  
Set the ZEBRA2 to ON, OFF, or SPOT.  
– C U F E  
LOW LIGHT LVL OFF  
Set the camera incoming light volume  
at which to display LOW LIGNT.  
10%  
15%  
20%  
25%  
30%  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
35%  
– C U F E  
ECU MENU  
DISP.  
ON  
OFF  
Set the menu display on the VF to ON  
or OFF when the ECU is connected.  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
– C U F E  
50M  
INDICATOR  
ON  
OFF  
Set the 50M recording indication to ON  
or OFF.  
– C U F E  
0%  
MARKER/CHAR 50%  
Adjust the brightness of markers and  
characters displayed on the VF.  
LVL  
60%  
70%  
80%  
90%  
100%  
<Note>  
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the  
item PAINT MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W  
SELECT> screen.  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
107  
       
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-4-2 VF MARKER  
8-4-4 VF INDICATOR1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
TABLE  
A
B
Select the VF MARKER setting table.  
First, select table A or B, then set the  
items below for each table.  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the extender indication to ON or  
OFF.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
CENTER MARK OFF  
Switch the center mark.  
OFF:Do not display center mark.  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the shutter speed indication to ON  
or OFF.  
1
2
3
4
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Hollow (large)  
+ (small)  
– C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the filter No. indication to ON or  
OFF.  
Hollow (small)  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
SAFETY ZONE OFF  
Select the frame type for the safety  
zone.  
OFF:Do not display frame.  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the AWB PRE/A/B indication to ON  
or OFF.  
1
2
– C U F E  
1:  
2:  
Box  
Corner frame  
GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
Set to ON or OFF the indications for  
current gain setting, S.GAIN.  
– C U F E  
SAFETY AREA 80%  
Set the position of the safety zone.  
– C U F E  
:
90%  
IRIS  
OFF  
IRIS  
S+IRIS  
S
OFF: Disable indications of both the  
super iris ON status and the iris  
value.  
:
– C U F E  
100%  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
Set the frame marker.  
Only enabled when REC MODE is set  
to 16:9.  
IRIS: Enable only the iris value  
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
indication.  
S+IRIS: Enables indications of the super  
iris ON status and the iris value.  
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.  
– C U F E  
S:  
Enable indication of the super  
iris ON status.  
FRAME MARK ON  
Set the frame marker to ON or OFF.  
OFF  
– C U F E  
(The iris value indication and the iris  
override indication/non indication are  
interlocked.)  
Select when to enable the ID mix during  
recording.  
FRAME LVL  
0
:
Set the level outside the frame marker.  
0: Equivalent to signal OFF.  
15: Same brightness as center area.  
This setting, however, is disabled if  
the FRAME SIG is set to VISTA.  
– C U F E  
15  
CAMERA ID  
OFF  
BAR  
CAM  
ALWAYS  
OFF:  
BAR:  
Disable ID mix.  
Enable when recording color  
bars.  
– C U F E  
CAM:  
Enable when recording  
camera image.  
ALWAYS: Enable always.  
<Note>  
8-4-3 USER BOX  
ID MIX INH of the “8-9-1 OPTION” is  
set to OFF to mix an ID to the camera  
image.  
ID is not superimposed in the EE mode,  
but recorded onto the P2 card.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– C U F E  
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
USER BOX.  
ID POSITION  
UPPER R  
UPPER L  
LOWER R  
LOWER L  
Set the camera ID recording position.  
UPPER R: Upper right.  
– C U F E  
UPPER L  
:
Upper left.  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1
:
13  
:
Set the width of the USER BOX.  
LOWER R: Lower right.  
LOWER L: Lower left.  
– C U F E  
100  
DATE/TIME  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to simultaneously  
mix the year/month/date and hour/  
minute/second when recording the  
camera ID.  
– C U F E  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
:
13  
:
Set the height of the USER BOX.  
– C U F E  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the zoom position indication to ON  
or OFF.  
– C U F E 121  
USER BOX H  
POS  
–50  
Set the horizontal position of the USER  
BOX.  
:
– C U F E  
+00  
:
COLOR TEMP ON  
OFF  
Set the color temperature indication to  
ON or OFF.  
– C U F E +50  
– C U F E  
USER BOX V  
POS  
–121  
Set the vertical position of the USER  
BOX.  
:
+000  
:
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
– C U F E +121  
108  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-4-5 VF INDICATOR2  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
REC STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable “REC”  
indication in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD monitor during recording.  
ON: REC indication enabled.  
OFF:REC indication not enabled.  
<Note>  
This option is useful when the AJ-  
SPC700P is used independently. When  
the 1394 control option is set to BOTH  
with an external IEEE 1394 device,  
settings are subject to setting of the  
menu option REC TALLY in SYSTEM  
MODE.  
P2CARD  
REMAIN  
OFF  
ONE-CARD  
TOTAL  
Select the indication mode for the P2  
card’s remaining capacity.  
OFF: Disable the remaining capacity  
indication.  
ONE-CARD:  
Display the remaining capacity  
of the P2 card currently used for  
recording.  
TOTAL: Display the total remaining  
capacity of all P2 cards in slots.  
Set the battery voltage indication to ON  
or OFF.  
– C U F E  
BATTERY  
ON  
OFF  
– C U F –  
– C U F E  
PROXY REC  
ON  
OFF  
When a video encoder card (AJ-  
YAX800G, optional) is attached, proxy  
recording information is displayed when  
recording starts.  
AUDIO LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the audio lever meter indication to  
ON or OFF.  
– C U F E  
ON: Display indicating whether proxy  
recording is to be performed on  
the P2 card only, or on both the  
P2 card and the SD memory card.  
OFF:Proxy recording information is not  
displayed.  
TC  
OFF  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
Select the time code to display.  
OFF: Disable the time code display.  
TCG: Display the time code generator  
value in E-E mode.  
TCR: Display the time code reader  
value in V-V mode.  
TCG/TCR:  
8
– C U F –  
Display the time code generator  
value in E-E mode, and the time  
code reader value in V-V mode.  
– C U F E  
8-4-6 MODE CHECK IND  
SYSTEM INFO OFF  
ALWAYS  
Select the method of displaying system  
information and warnings.  
OFF:Display no warnings other than  
“TURN POWER OFF” and  
“SYSTEM ERROR”.  
NORMAL  
Items/  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Data Saved  
ALWAYS:  
Always display warnings.  
NORMAL:  
Display warnings for 3 seconds only  
when problems occur.  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
status indication during MODE CHECK.  
– C U F E  
!LED  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
cause indication screen when the ! LED  
turns on during MODE CHECK  
– C U F E  
SAVE LED  
P2CARD  
SAVE  
Set the SAVE lamp function.  
P2CARD:  
– C U F E  
FUNCTION  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
FUNCTION indication screen during  
MODE CHECK.  
The lamp blinks in synch with  
the warning message when the  
P2 card’s remaining recording  
capacity is getting low.  
– C U F E  
AUDIO  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
AUDIO indication screen during MODE  
CHECK.  
SAVE: The lamp lights up when the  
SAVE ON/OFF switch is set to  
ON and the output system  
assigned in [8-2-2 OPTION  
MODE] is in the save mode.  
DV Select whether or not to enable DV  
indication when the format is set to DV.  
ON: Enable DV indication.  
OFF:Disable DV indication.  
– C U F E  
P.ON IND  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
status indication screen after the power  
is turned ON.  
– C U F E  
DV  
ON  
– C U F E  
OFF  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
– C U F E  
VOICEMEMO  
ON  
Select whether or not to enable the  
indication during voice memo  
recording.  
V
OFF  
ON: Enable  
OFF:Disable  
indication.  
indication.  
V
V
– C U F E  
109  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-5 CAM OPERATION  
8-4-7 !LED  
8-5-1 CAMERA ID  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
GAIN(0dB)  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when GAIN is set to other than 0 dB.  
ID1  
Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
GAIN (-3dB)  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when GAIN is set to other than –3 dB.  
ID2  
Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when the shutter is set to ON.  
ID3  
Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded  
on color bars. Up to 10 characters are  
allowed for this setting.  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
WHITE  
PRESET  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when the WHITE BAL switch is set to  
PRST.  
<Note>  
– C U F E  
This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is  
selected.  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when the lens is in EXTENDER mode.  
– C U F E  
BLACK STR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when BLACK STRETCH is used.  
8-5-2 SHUTTER SPEED  
– C U F E  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when MATRIX is set to ON.  
Remarks  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter  
speed selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
COLOR  
CORRECTION OFF  
ON  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when COLOR CORRECTION is set to  
ON.  
– C U F E  
SUPER V  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate SUPER V as a shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate the  
lamp when filter1 (3200K) is not 3200K.  
– C U F E  
POSITION1  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION1 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
– C U F E  
SUPER V  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when SUPER V is set to ON.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
50M/25M/DV  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
according to the recording mode.  
OFF:Does not illuminate in any  
recording mode.  
POSITION2  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION2 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
W/O 50M  
W/O 25M  
W/O DV  
W/O 50M:  
Illuminate except in DVCPRO50  
mode.  
W/O 25M:  
llluminate except in DVCPRO  
mode.  
W/O DV:  
– C U F E  
POSITION3  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION3 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
Illuminate except in DV mode.  
ATW  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate  
when auto-tracking white balance is  
allocated to the WHITE BAL switch B.  
POSITION4  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION4 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
<Note>  
POSITION5  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION5 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
If both GAIN (0 dB) and GAIN (–3 dB) are set to ON, the  
LED illuminates except when GAIN is adjusted to 0 dB and  
–3 dB.  
– C U F E  
POSITION6  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION6 SELECT in the  
<SHUTTER SELECT> screen as the  
shutter speed selectable by the shutter  
switch.  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
110  
         
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-5-3 SHUTTER SELECT  
8-5-4 USER SW  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
SUPER V  
MODE  
FRM1  
FRM2  
Select the SUPER V switching mode.  
FRM1: Normal mode.  
FRM2: After-image reduction mode.  
<Note>  
USER MAIN SW INH  
S.GAIN  
Allocate the USER MAIN button.  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
The SUPER V mode increases vertical  
resolution by directly outputting the  
photo-diode vertical signal from the  
CCD. FRM1 sets the accumulation level  
to 1/30th second. FRM sets the level to  
1/60th second, reducing sensitivity by  
half.  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
ATW  
Y GET  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
PRE REC  
USB  
– C U F E  
POSITION1  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION1.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
USER1 SW  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
Allocate the USER1 button.  
POSITION2  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION2.  
8
B.STR  
ATW  
– C U F E  
Y GET  
POSITION3  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION3.  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
PRE REC  
USB  
– C U F E  
POSITION4  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION4.  
– C U F E  
USER2 SW  
INH  
S.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
ATW  
Y GET  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
PRE REC  
USB  
Allocate the USER2 button.  
– C U F E  
POSITION5  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION5.  
– C U F E  
POSITION6  
SEL  
1/100  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated  
to POSITION6.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
<Note>  
For each function of the USER switches, refer to [4-9-4  
Assigning Functions to USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
Buttons].  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
111  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-5-5 SW MODE  
8-5-6 WHITE BALANCE MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
RET SW  
REC  
CHECK  
CAM RET  
Select the RET switch function.  
REC CHECK:  
Perform REC REVIEW.  
CAM RET:  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to retain white  
balance memory (A/B) data for  
individual filters.  
ON: Retain data in the A/B memory (2  
memory areas) regardless of the  
filters.  
Perform return signal output.  
– C U F E  
S.BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
Set the super black level.  
OFF:Retain data for individual filters.  
– C U F E  
SHOCKLESS  
AWB  
OFF  
FAST  
NORMAL  
SLOW1  
SLOW2  
SLOW3  
Set SHOCKLESS AWB to ON (FAST/  
NORMAL/SLOW1-3) or OFF.  
SHOCKLESS AWB eliminates the  
shock caused by switching the WHITE  
BAL switch’s PRST/A/B setting. The  
switching time can also be selected.  
– C U F E  
AUTO KNEE  
SW  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to use the AUTO  
KNEE switch.  
S C U F E  
– C U F E  
SHD,ABB SW  
CTL  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the  
automatic black shading adjustment if  
the ABB switch has been pressed for 5  
seconds or more.  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
Switch the AWB detection area.  
25%:Detect 25% of area around the  
screen center.  
– C U F E  
50%:Detect 50% of area around the  
screen center.  
90%:Detect 90% of area in the full  
screen.  
COLOR BARS SMPTE  
Select the color bars to use.  
SMPTE:  
Use the SMPTE color bars.  
FULL  
BARS  
SPLIT  
ARIB  
FULL BARS: Use full color bars.  
– C U F E  
SPLIT:  
ARIB:  
Use SPLIT color bars.  
Use ARIB multi-format  
color bars.  
AWB & ABB  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to reset the GAIN  
and PED values in the ROP menu  
when AWB and ABB are executed.  
ON: Do not reset.  
– C U F E  
S.GAIN OFF  
L/M/H  
Select when the SUPER GAIN mode is  
disabled.  
L/M/H: Disabled when the gain selector  
switch is operated.  
S.GAIN:Disabled only with the S.GAIN  
switch (USER button).  
OFF:Reset values.  
S.GAIN  
– C U F E  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
PRE  
Set the AWB PRE color temperature.  
:
5600K  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
AWB A  
MEM  
VAR  
Select the function to be allocated to  
WHITE BAL switch A.  
MEM: Function to store values set by  
executing the auto white  
balance.  
VAR: Function to apply color  
temperature set by COLOR  
TEMP A.  
ECU DATA  
SAVE  
ON  
OFF  
ON: Store the values set and adjusted  
with the ECU when the ECU is  
disconnected from the camera-  
recorder.  
OFF:Does not store camera-related  
set values.  
– C U F –  
ECU REC CHK R.REVIEW  
Select the camera-recorder operation  
to be performed when the ECU REC  
CHECK button is pressed.  
– C U F E  
SW  
PLAY  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
A
Set the color temperature when VAR is  
selected under AWB A.  
:
R.REVIEW: Perform REC REVIEW.  
5600K  
– C U F E  
PLAY:  
Play back the most-recently  
recorded clip from the  
beginning.  
AWB B  
MEM  
VAR  
ATW  
Select the function to be allocated to  
WHITE BAL switch B.  
MEM: Function to store values set by  
executing auto white balance.  
VAR: Function to apply color  
temperature set by COLOR  
TEMP B.  
– C U F E  
ATW: Function to execute auto-  
tracking white balance.  
– C U F E  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
Set the color temperature when VAR is  
selected under AWB B.  
:
B
5600K  
– C U F E  
ATW SPEED  
NORMAL  
SLOW  
FAST  
Select the control speed for the auto-  
tracking white balance.  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
112  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-6 MAIN OPERATION  
8-5-7 USER SW GAIN  
8-6-1 BATTERY/P2CARD  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
S.GAIN  
30 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 30dB  
for SUPER GAIN.  
_: Enable.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
Select the battery to use. Remaining  
capacity detection is also performed  
according to the selected battery.  
The selectable battery types change  
depending on the settings under [8-6-2  
BATTERY SETTING1] and [8-6-3  
BATTERY SETTING2].  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON100  
HYTRON120  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
HP-90L  
• : Disable.  
– C U F E  
36 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 36dB  
for SUPER GAIN.  
_: Enable.  
• : Disable.  
– C U F E  
BP-H120  
NP-L50  
ENDURA50  
ENDURA80  
BP-L60/90  
NiCd14  
8-5-8 IRIS  
NiCd13  
NiCd12  
TYPE A  
TYPE B  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– C U F –  
A.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
050  
:
Set the target value for auto iris.  
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC_ADPT  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
HYTRON50  
HYTRON100  
HYTRON120  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
HP-90L  
Set the remaining capacity detection  
type when a battery is connected to the  
DC IN connector. Remaining capacity  
detection is also performed according  
to the selected battery type.  
8
– C U F E 100  
A.IRIS PEAK/  
AVE  
000  
:
040  
:
Determine the peak-to-standard ratio  
for the auto iris.  
A larger value sets the auto iris to  
respond to the peak in the IRIS  
detection window, while a smaller value  
sets it to respond to the average value  
in the window.  
The selectable battery types change  
depending on the settings under [8-6-2  
BATTERY SETTING1] and [8-6-3  
BATTERY SETTING2].  
100  
<Note>  
BP-H120  
NP-L50  
The % display is disabled even when a  
digital battery is connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
– C U F E  
ENDURA50  
ENDURA80  
BP-L60/90  
NiCd14  
NiCd13  
NiCd12  
A.IRIS MODE  
NORM1  
NORM2  
CENTR  
Select the auto iris detection window.  
NORM1:The window closer to the center  
of the screen.  
NORM2:The window closer to bottom of  
the screen.  
CENTR:The spot window in the center of  
the screen.  
TYPE A  
TYPE B  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
S.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
080  
:
Set the target value for the super iris.  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm  
to beep for BATT NEAR END ALARM.  
– C U F –  
– C U F E 100  
BATT NEAR  
ON  
If set to ON, the warning tone and  
indication can be canceled by pressing  
the MODE CHECK button when BATT  
NEAR END ALARM is triggered.  
IRIS GAIN  
CAM  
LENS  
Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN.  
<Note>  
END CANCEL OFF  
Lenses with an extender, such asꢄC2,  
C0.8 sold before FUJINON DIGI  
POWER, perform IRIS compensation  
while enabling the extender. Therefore,  
if this setting is switched to CAM, the  
camera’s iris control will not operate  
properly.  
– C U F –  
BATT END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm  
to beep for BATT END ALARM.  
– C U F –  
BATT REMAIN 70%  
Set the display content of the remaining  
battery capacity indicator bars in the  
display window when using a digital  
battery.  
70%: Indicate FULL at 70% capacity.  
100%: Indicate FULL at 100% capacity.  
– C U F E  
FULL  
100%  
IRIS GAIN  
VALUE  
01  
:
08  
:
Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN.  
This setting is effective when CAM is  
selected for IRIS GAIN.  
– C U F E 20  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
113  
         
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
CARD NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm  
to beep for P2 CARD NEAR END  
ALARM.  
PRO14  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the  
above menu, set the NEAR END  
voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
– C U F –  
CARD NEAR  
END TIME  
2min  
3min  
Set the remaining time to indicate the  
P2 CARD NEAR END TIME alarm.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
– C U F –  
CARD END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm  
to beep for P2 CARD END ALARM.  
11.0  
:
13.9  
:
– C U F –  
CARD REMAIN/ 3min/  
5min/  
„
„
Set the length of time for one segment  
(„) of the P2 card’s remaining capacity  
indicator bars.  
15.0  
– C U F –  
„
TRIM14  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
3min/„: One segment represents 3  
minutes.  
5min/„: One segment represents 5  
minutes.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
– C U F –  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
HYTRON50  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
HYTRON100  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
HYTRON120  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
114  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
DIONIC90  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
ENDURA50  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
DIONIC160  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
ENDURA80  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
8
11.0  
:
13.3  
:
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HP-90L  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
BP-L60/90  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
12.8  
:
11.0  
:
11.2  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
BP-H120  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
<Note>  
The remaining battery capacity for digital batteries is  
displayed as % inside the viewfinder (PRO14/TRIM14/  
HYTRON50/HYTRON100/HYTRON120/DIONIC90/  
DIONIC160/NP-L50/ENDURA50/ENDURA80).  
The BATT NEAR END alarm, however, is triggered  
according to the setting on the <BATTERY SETTING1>  
screen, regardless of the % indication.  
• :Disable selection.  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
11.0  
:
11.5  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
NP-L50  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR  
END voltage.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in  
0.1 V steps.  
11.0  
:
13.3  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
115  
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-6-3 BATTERY SETTING2  
8-6-4 MIC/AUDIO1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
NiCd14  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
FRONT VR CH1 OFF  
FRONT  
Select whether or not to enable the  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the  
signal selected as the input signal to  
AUDIO CH1.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not  
change by turning the volume  
control.  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
NEAR END 11.0  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
15.0  
FRONT:Only enabled when FRONT is  
END  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
selected.  
W.L.: Only enabled when WIRELESS  
is selected.  
REAR:Only enabled when REAR is  
– C U F –  
selected.  
NiCd13  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
– C U F –  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
FRONT VR CH2 OFF  
FRONT  
Select whether or not to enable the  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control for the  
signal selected as an input signal to  
AUDIO CH2.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not  
change by turning the volume  
control.  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
NEAR END 11.0  
:
12.7  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
12.2  
:
15.0  
END  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
FRONT:Only enabled when FRONT is  
selected.  
W.L.: Only enabled when WIRELESS  
is selected.  
REAR:Only enabled when REAR is  
– C U F –  
NiCd12  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
selected.  
– C U F –  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
MIC LOWCUT OFF  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
NEAR END 11.0  
CH1  
FRONT  
:
11.5  
:
15.0  
W.L.  
REAR  
– C U F –  
END  
11.0  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
MIC LOWCUT OFF  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
:
CH2  
FRONT  
11.2  
:
15.0  
W.L.  
REAR  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
TYPE A  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
LIMITER CH1  
ON  
OFF  
Select the limiter.  
Select the limiter.  
– C U F –  
LIMITER CH2  
ON  
OFF  
FULL  
12.0  
:
15.0  
:
– C U F –  
25M REC CH  
SEL  
2CH  
4CH  
Select the audio channels to be  
recorded in the DVCPRO and DV  
formats.  
2CH:Only recorded in CH1 and CH2.  
4CH:Recorded in all channels from  
CH1 to CH4.  
17.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
– C U F –  
END  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
TEST TONE  
OFF  
Select the test signal.  
OFF:  
Disable test tone output.  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
CHSEL  
NORMAL: Output test tones to CH1/2  
– C U F –  
15.0  
when the OUTPUT/AUTO  
KNEE selector switch is set to  
BARS and the AUDIO IN  
TYPE B  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY  
SELECT.  
_:Enable selection.  
• :Disable selection.  
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
switch CH1 is set to FRONT.  
ALWAYS  
:
Output test tones to CH1/2 when  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector  
switch is set to BARS.  
FULL  
12.0  
:
13.5  
:
CHSEL  
:
Output test tone to the  
channels where the AUDIO  
IN switch CH1 or CH2 is set  
to FRONT when OUTPUT/  
AUTO KNEE selector switch  
is set to BARS. The test tone  
is not output to CH3 and CH4.  
17.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
:
11.8  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
11.1  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
END  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
– C U F –  
116  
       
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-6-5 MIC/AUDIO2  
8-6-6 TC/UB  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Select the phantom power supply for  
the front microphone.  
TC MODE  
DF  
NDF  
Set the time code mode.  
DF:  
Drop frame.  
NDF: Non drop frame.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Select the phantom power supply for  
the rear microphone.  
UB MODE  
USER  
TIME  
DATE  
EXT  
TCG  
Select the user bits mode.  
USER:Select UB value set in the LCD  
section.  
– C U F –  
TIME: Select local time (hours,  
AUDIO OUT  
ON  
OFF  
Set the audio output circuit.  
OFF:Power-down output circuit to  
disable output.  
minutes, seconds).  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
digits of year, month, date,  
time).  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
ON: Enable output.  
– C U F –  
EXT: When “CAM” or “VIDEO” is  
selected in the menu option  
REC SIGNAL in the SYSTEM  
MODE screen, user’s bit input to  
the TC IN connector is the  
reference.  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
STEREO  
MIX  
Select the signal format for output to  
the PHONE (earphones) jack.  
– C U F –  
FRONT MIC  
LEVEL  
–40dB  
–50dB  
Select the front microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear line input level.  
When “1394” is selected, user’s  
bit input to the DVCPRO/DV  
connector is the reference.  
If reading fails, USER value is  
retained.  
– C U F –  
8
REAR MIC CH1 –50dB  
LVL  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
Select same camera shoting  
information (frame rate, etc.) with  
the VAUX UB (VITC UB).  
REGEN:Read out value stored in the  
card and record value  
REAR MIC CH2 –50dB  
LVL  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
REAR LINE IN  
LVL  
–3dB  
0dB  
+4dB  
– C U F –  
continuously.  
– C U F –  
AUDIO OUT LVL –3dB  
0dB  
Select the audio output level.  
VITC UB MODE USER/EXT  
Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC  
(VITC).  
USER/EXT:  
TIME  
DATE  
TCG  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
+4dB  
– C U F –  
HEADROOM  
18dB  
20dB  
Set the headroom (standard level).  
If UB MODE is set to EXT, the  
EXT value is recorded. If not,  
USER value set by UB is  
recorded.  
– C U F –  
WIRELESS  
WARN  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the  
alarm to trigger for poor wireless  
receiver reception.  
TIME: Select local time (hours,  
– C U F –  
minutes, seconds).  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
digits of year, month, date,  
time).  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
Select same camera shoting  
information (frame rate, etc.) with  
the VAUX UB (VITC UB).  
REGEN:Read out value stored in card  
and record value continuously.  
– C U F –  
TCG SET HOLD ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the feature that  
always starts recording (when the  
power is turned ON again) the TCG  
value that was set before the power is  
turned OFF.  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
117  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-7 FILE  
8-7-1 SD CARD READ/WRITE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
FIRST REC TC PRESET  
REGEN  
For the first recording after the power is  
turned on, a P2 card is inserted and  
then switching from this P2 card to  
another recording-target P2 card is  
performed, select whether or not to  
regenerate the time code as the value  
on the new P2 card.  
PRESET:  
Use the camera-recorder’s internal  
time code.  
R.SELECT  
1
:
8
Select the file number to read out.  
– – – F –  
READ  
Read out the data from the SD memory  
card.  
– – – – –  
W.SELECT  
1
:
8
Select the file number to write in.  
– – – F –  
REGEN:For clips recorded on the  
recording-target P2 card,  
WRITE  
Write the camera-recorder’s menu data  
to the SD memory card.  
regenerate the time code as the  
time code of the clip that has the  
most recent date and time.  
<Note>  
– – – – –  
CARD CONFIG  
Format the SD memory card.  
Set the date and time accurately. For  
guidance on setting, see [4-5-2 Setting  
the Internal Clock’s Date and Time].  
– – – – –  
– C U F –  
TITLE READ  
Read out the title of the data recorded  
on the SD memory card.  
P.OFF LCD  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
time code setting and counter  
indication on the LCD monitor when the  
power is turned OFF.  
ON: Display setting and indication  
while the power is turned OFF.  
OFF:Power-down LCD monitor while  
camera power is turned OFF.  
Setting and indication disabled.  
– – – – –  
TITLE1-8:  
Up to 8 letters can be set for the title  
name.  
– – – – –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
– C U F –  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
Select the time code to be output to the  
time code output connector.  
TCG:Always output time code  
generator value.  
TCG/TCR:  
Display time code generator value  
in E-E mode, and time code  
reader value in V-V mode.  
– C U F –  
8-6-7 UMID SET/INFO  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
COUNTRY  
NO-INFO  
Input the user’s country. NO-INFO is  
displayed until the input completes.  
– C U F –  
ORGANIZATION NO-INFO  
Input the user’s organisation or  
company name. NO-INFO is displayed  
until the input completes.  
– C U F –  
USER  
NO-INFO  
Input the user name. NO-INFO is  
displayed until the input completes.  
– C U F –  
DEVICE NODE  
Indicate the product ID number.  
– – – – –  
<Note>  
Please refer to [4-5-6 Setting UMID Information] for the  
UMID information setting.  
118  
     
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT  
8-7-3 LENS FILE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
ID READ/  
WRITE  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
CAMERA ID when reading out or  
writing to the SD memory card.  
FILE NO.  
1
:
8
Select the lens file number.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
USER MENU  
SELECT R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
FILE MENU settings when reading out  
or writing to the SD memory card.  
READ  
Read the lens file data.  
Write the lens file data.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
SYSTEM MENU ON  
R/W  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the SYSTEM SETTING page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
WRITE  
OFF  
– – – – –  
– – – F –  
TITLE1-8  
Up to 12 letters can be set for the title  
name.  
PAINT MENU  
LEVEL R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
adjusted values on the PAINT page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
– – – – –  
– – – F –  
PAINT MENU  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the PAINT MENU page when  
reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
8-7-4 SCENE  
SW(„  
) R/W  
8
– – – F –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
PAINT (FLARE) ON  
R/W  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the FLARE page when  
reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
OFF  
READ USER  
DATA  
Read out the data from the user area in  
the memory.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
VF MENU  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the VF page when reading  
out or writing to the SD memory card.  
SCENE SEL  
1
:
4
Select the scene file.  
Read the scene file.  
Write the scene file.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
CAM OPE  
MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the CAM OPERATION page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
READ  
– – – – –  
– – – F –  
WRITE  
MAIN OPE  
MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAIN OPERATION page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
– – – – –  
RESET  
Reset the scene file values to the initial  
values.  
– – – F –  
MAINTE MENU ON  
R/W  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAINTENANCE page  
when reading out or writing to the SD  
memory card.  
– – – – –  
OFF  
TITLE 1-4  
Create the scene file title.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
8-7-5 INITIALIZE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
READ  
FACTORY DATA  
The menu (USER MENU, MAIN MENU,  
OPTION MENU) values are all reset to  
factory settings.  
– – – – –  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
Save the user preference menu data in  
the camera’s internal memory.  
– – – – –  
RESET LENS  
FILES  
Reset the lens file data to the factory  
settings.  
– – – – –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
119  
       
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-8 MAINTENANCE  
8-8-1 SYSTEM CHECK  
8-8-5 DIAGNOSTIC1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
COLOR CHECK ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for checking proper  
operation of the camera-recorder.  
Displays the center Y and RGB levels  
on the viewfinder to indicate whether  
the signals have been properly  
processed and transmitted from the  
optical system to the digital system.  
CAMSOFT(IN)  
Display the software version for the  
microprocessor-controlled flash.  
– – – – –  
CAMSOFT  
(OUT)  
Display the software version for the  
external flash.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
CAM TABLE  
Display the table version.  
– – – – –  
8-8-2 LENS ADJ  
FONT ROM  
Display the character font version.  
– – – – –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CAM DSP CPLD  
Display the program version for the  
CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic  
Device) that processes camera block  
signals.  
F2.8 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is only set to F2.8 when this  
item set to ON.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
CAM SYS  
FPGA  
Display the program version for the  
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate  
Array) that processes camera block  
signals.  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is only set to F16 when this  
item set to ON.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
PULSE FPGA  
Display the program version for the  
FPGA that processes the CCD  
scanning.  
8-8-3 BLACK SHADING  
– – – – –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
Remarks  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for digital black  
shading compensation.  
– C U F E  
DETECTION  
(DIG)  
–
Execute digital black shading  
compensation.  
– – – – –  
8-8-4 WHITE SHADING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for white shading  
compensation.  
– C U F E  
DETECTION  
(V SAW)  
–
Execute white shading compensation.  
– – – – –  
120  
           
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables (continued)  
8-9 OPTION MENU  
8-8-6 DIAGNOSTIC2  
8-9-1 OPTION  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
SYSCON SOFT  
Display the software version for the  
system control microprocessor.  
ENG  
SECURITY  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to prohibit  
opening the menu screen.  
ON: Menu screen cannot be opened.  
Please consult your distributor to  
release the setting.  
– – – – –  
LCD SOFT  
Display the software version for the  
LCD microprocessor.  
OFF:Menu screen can be opened.  
– C – – –  
– – – – –  
ID MIX INH  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to inhibit mixing  
the ID in the camera image.  
ON: Inhibit mixing. ID is not mixed in  
P2CS OS  
Display the OS version for the  
streaming controller.  
– – – – –  
the camera image.  
OFF:Do not inhibit. Camera ID setting  
under VF INDCATOR1 is  
P2CS AP  
Display the application version for the  
streaming controller.  
reflected in the camera image.  
– C – – –  
– – – – –  
AUDIO OUT  
DELAY  
DELAYED  
THROUGH  
Select whether or not to delay audio,  
headphone and speaker outputs.  
DELAYED:  
Delay audio output in  
synchronisation with video output.  
THROUGH:  
Output audio input without delay.  
This setting prevents echo effect  
between the sound source and  
audio output when the sound source  
is near the camera-recorder.  
MSC FPGA  
Display the program version for MSC  
FPGA streaming control and for  
recording/playback signal processing  
FPGA.  
– – – – –  
8
SIF FPGA  
Display the program version for the  
serial interface FPGA.  
– – – – –  
DIF FPGA  
Display program version for the  
IEEE1394 interface FPGA.  
(when AJ-YAD800G is attached).  
– C – – –  
– – – – –  
<Note>  
Menu options for setting 1394 are displayed when an  
IEEE1394 interface board (AJ-YAD800G, optional) is  
attached. For more information, see the AJ-YAD800G  
instruction manual.  
8-8-7 HOURS METER  
Items/  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Data Saved  
OPERATION  
Display total hours the camera power  
has been turned ON.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the  
preset mode.  
– – – – –  
LCD  
BACKLIGHT  
Display total hours the LCD monitor  
backlight power has been turned ON.  
– – – – –  
P. O N T I M E S  
Display total number of times the power  
switch has been turned ON.  
– – – – –  
121  
       
Chapter 9 Specifications  
Sensitivity:  
[General]  
F11 (2000 lx, 89.9% reflection)  
Minimum object illuminance:  
0.5 lx  
(F1.4 with +36 dB (S.GAIN))  
Video S/N:  
Power supplyꢏꢇDC 12 V (11.0 V - 17.0 V)  
Power consumption:  
17 W (Main unit only, with LCD monitor OFF)  
20 W (With the IEEE1394 option installed, LCD  
monitor ON)  
64 dB (standard)  
Horizontal resolution:  
750 lines (center, standard)  
Vertical resolution:  
indicates safety information.  
400/450 lines (SUPER V mode)  
LCD Monitor:  
Operating temperature:  
0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to +104 °F)  
Storage temperature:  
3.5-inch LCD color monitor, 200,000 pixels  
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)  
Operating humidity:  
[Memory Card Unit]  
10% to maximum 85% (relative humidity)  
Maximum continuous operation:  
Approximately 160 minutes (main unit only, with  
LCD monitor OFF and using an Anton/Bauer  
Hytron50 battery)  
Dimensions (W C H [excluding handle and  
wireless option cover] C D):  
137 mm C 209 mm C 318 mm  
(5-3/16 inches C 8-1/2 inches C 12-1/2 inches)  
Weight:  
Video recording formats:  
Selectable from DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV  
Audio recording formats:  
48 kHz 16-bit 4ch (DVCPRO50)  
48 kHz 16-bit 2ch/4ch selectable (DVCPRO)  
Recording/playback time:  
Approximately 8 minutes:  
When recorded in DVCPRO format using one  
AJ-P2C002SG card with audio signals  
recorded on 2 channels.  
4.1 kg (9.03 lb)  
(main unit only, excluding VF mount)  
Approximately 16 minutes:  
When recorded in DVCPRO format using one  
AJ-P2C004HG card with audio signals  
recorded on 2 channels.  
[Camera Unit]  
Pickup devices:  
2/3-inch, 520,000 pixels IT CCD C 3  
CC/ND Filters:  
Approximately 32 minutes:  
When recorded in DVCPRO format using one  
AJ-P2C008HG card with audio signals  
recorded on 2 channels.  
1: 3200K  
2: 5600K + 1/8ND  
3: 5600K  
4: 5600K + 1/64ND  
<Note>  
This recording time represents one shot  
continuously recorded on a P2 card. The  
recording time may be shorter, depending on the  
number of shots recorded.  
Quantizing:  
14-bit linear/18 MHz  
Digital signal processing:  
For the latest information on P2 cards not available in  
the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk  
at the following Web sites.  
36 MHz  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
18 MHz  
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/pro-av/  
Programmable gain:  
Three positions (L/M/H) can be set by selecting  
from –3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +15, +18, +21, +24,  
+27 or +30 dB  
Super Gain (S.GAIN):  
Selectable from +30, +36 dB  
Shutter speeds:  
Video System  
Analog component output:  
Frequency range:  
Y:  
30 Hz to 5.75 MHz, +1.0/–3.0 dB  
(DVCPRO50)  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
Synchro-scan shutter:  
1/60.3 to 1/249.7  
PB/PR: 30 Hz to 2.75 MHz, +1.0/–3.0 dB  
(DVCPRO50)  
S/N:  
Lens mount:  
Minimum 55 dB  
2/3-inch bayonet type  
Color separation optical system:  
Optical prism (F1.4)  
122  
 
Chapter 9 Specifications (continued)  
Audio System  
Time code input  
TC IN:  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz (synchronised with video)  
Quantizing:  
BNC, 0.5 VP-P to 8 VP-P, 10 kJ  
Time code output  
16 bits  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz - 20 kHz 1.0 dB (at standard level)  
Dynamic range:  
TC OUT:  
BNC, low impedance, 2.0 0.5 VP-P  
Minimum 85 dB (1 kHz, AWTD)  
Distortion factor:  
0.1% or less (1 kHz, standard level)  
Headroom:  
Miscellaneous  
DC IN:  
XLR, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V)  
DC OUT:  
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V)  
Maximum rated current: 1 A  
LENS:  
20 dB  
[Input/output Unit]  
Multiple 12 pins  
EVF:  
Video input  
Multiple 20 pins  
ECU:  
6 pins (connector for AJ-EC3P)  
USB :  
Type-B connector (USB ver.2.0)  
DVCPRO/DV :  
GEN LOCK IN:  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J  
(VIDEO IN can be selected by switching menu.)  
Video output  
9
CAM OUT:  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J  
VIDEO OUT:  
6-pin (IEEE1394 compatible)  
(IEEE1394 interface board [AJ-YAD800G] should  
be attached.)  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J  
Audio input  
[Accessories]  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:  
XLR C 2, 3 pins  
Shoulder Strap  
Front Audio Level control knob  
Control knob mounting screwC1  
LINE, MIC, and +48 V switch-selectable  
LINE: +4 dBu  
(–3/0/+4 dBu selectable with menu)  
MIC: –60 dBu  
(–60/–50 dBu selectable with menu)  
MIC + 48V:  
Compatible with +48V phantom power  
supply  
–60 dBu  
(–60/–50 dBu selectable with menu)  
MIC IN:  
XLR, 3 pins  
+48 V phantom:  
ON/OFF selectable with menu,  
3 kJ balanced, –50/–40 dBu selectable  
with menu  
WIRELESS IN:  
25 pin D-SUB, –40 dBu  
Audio output  
AUDIO OUT:  
XLR, 3 pins, +4 dBu  
(–3/0/+4 dBu selectable with menu)  
Balanced low-impedance output  
Headphones  
Stereo mini jack C 2  
Weight and dimentions when shown are approximately.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
123  
PANASONIC BROADCAST & TELEVISION SYSTEMS COMPANY  
UNIT COMPANY OF PANASONIC CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA  
Executive Office:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000  
EASTERN ZONE:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7196  
Southeast Region: (201) 348-7162  
WESTERN ZONE:  
3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500  
Government Marketing Department:  
One Panasonic Way 2E-10, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7587  
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:  
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880  
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:  
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010  
Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.  
Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127  
Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300  
P
© 2005 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.  

QSC Audio Car Speaker K8 User Manual
QSC Audio Car Amplifier CXD43 User Manual
Panasonic cq rx300n User Manual
Panasonic CQ C1304U User Manual
Melissa 643 104 User Manual
KitchenAid 4KFP720OB1 User Manual
Kenwood KCA XM100V User Manual
Kenwood HM 682MD User Manual
JVC KD KD R710 User Manual
JVC KD A625 User Manual